LN: Configuring Manufacturing for the

Cloud Training Workbook

Infor LN
November 19, 2020
Course code: 01_9022005_IEN0042_ELN
Legal Notice
Copyright © 2020 Infor. All rights reserved.

Important Notices
The material contained in this publication (including any supplementary information) constitutes and
contains confidential and proprietary information of Infor.
By gaining access to the attached, you acknowledge and agree that the material (including any
modification, translation or adaptation of the material) and all copyright, trade secrets and all other right,
title and interest therein, are the sole property of Infor and that you shall not gain right, title or interest in
the material (including any modification, translation or adaptation of the material) by virtue of your review
thereof other than the non-exclusive right to use the material solely in connection with and the furtherance
of your license and use of software made available to your company from Infor pursuant to a separate
agreement, the terms of which separate agreement shall govern your use of this material and all
supplemental related materials ("Purpose").
In addition, by accessing the enclosed material, you acknowledge and agree that you are required to
maintain such material in strict confidence and that your use of such material is limited to the Purpose
described above. Although Infor has taken due care to ensure that the material included in this publication
is accurate and complete, Infor cannot warrant that the information contained in this publication is
complete, does not contain typographical or other errors, or will meet your specific requirements. As such,
Infor does not assume and hereby disclaims all liability, consequential or otherwise, for any loss or
damage to any person or entity which is caused by or relates to errors or omissions in this publication
(including any supplementary information), whether such errors or omissions result from negligence,
accident or any other cause.
Without limitation, U.S. export control laws and other applicable export and import laws govern your use
of this material and you will neither export or re-export, directly or indirectly, this material nor any related
materials or supplemental information in violation of such laws, or use such materials for any purpose
prohibited by such laws.

Trademark Acknowledgements
The word and design marks set forth herein are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Infor and/or
related affiliates and subsidiaries. All rights reserved. All other company, product, trade, or service names
referenced may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of contents
Table of contents ........................................................................................................................................ 3
About this workbook .................................................................................................................................. 8
Course overview ....................................................................................................................................... 10
Course description and agenda .............................................................................................................. 11
Lesson 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 15
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 16
Job Shop Control module ................................................................................................................... 16
Production orders - functional overview .............................................................................................. 16
Business case ......................................................................................................................................... 18
Scenario: Manufacturing for a smartphone company ......................................................................... 18
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 19
Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data .................................................................................................... 20
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 21
Items ........................................................................................................................................................ 22
Create new items ................................................................................................................................ 22
Item – production ................................................................................................................................ 22
Item – purchase .................................................................................................................................. 22
Item – ordering .................................................................................................................................... 22
Scenario: Create new items ................................................................................................................ 23
Exercise 2.1: Log in to Infor LN ........................................................................................................... 24
Exercise 2.2: Create new items .......................................................................................................... 25
Bill of material .......................................................................................................................................... 34
Production Item 360 session ............................................................................................................... 34
Bill of material ...................................................................................................................................... 34
Scenario: Create BOM ........................................................................................................................ 34
Exercise 2.3: Create BOM .................................................................................................................. 36
Shop floor design and routing ................................................................................................................. 40
Work centers ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Employees .......................................................................................................................................... 40
Machines ............................................................................................................................................. 40
Tasks ................................................................................................................................................... 41
Routings .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Scenario: Define shop floor design and routing .................................................................................. 42
Exercise 2.4: Create shop floor data ................................................................................................... 43
Exercise 2.5: Define routings .............................................................................................................. 54
Cost price calculation .............................................................................................................................. 61
Calculate cost and valuation prices .................................................................................................... 61
Scenario: Cost price calculation .......................................................................................................... 62
Exercise 2.6: Calculate cost and valuation prices .............................................................................. 63
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 66
Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue ................................................................................ 67
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 68
Production process with manual material issue and hours accounting .................................................. 69
Create production order ...................................................................................................................... 69
Print and release production order documents ................................................................................... 69
Initiate material to issue for production order ...................................................................................... 71
Process outbound advice .................................................................................................................... 71

3 Table of contents
 Report operations completed .............................................................................................................. 71
Production order hours ....................................................................................................................... 72
Report order completed ...................................................................................................................... 72
Warehouse receipts ............................................................................................................................ 73
Close production orders ...................................................................................................................... 73
Scenario: Production process with manual material issue ................................................................. 74
Exercise 3.1: Create production order ................................................................................................ 75
Exercise 3.2: Print order documents and release order ..................................................................... 77
Exercise 3.3: Initiate material to issue for production order ................................................................ 79
Exercise 3.4: Process outbound advice .............................................................................................. 80
Exercise 3.5: Report operations completed ........................................................................................ 81
Exercise 3.6: Post and process production order hours ..................................................................... 82
Exercise 3.7: Report order completed ................................................................................................ 84
Exercise 3.8: Process warehouse receipt ........................................................................................... 85
Exercise 3.9: Close production order .................................................................................................. 86
Check your understanding ...................................................................................................................... 87
Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue ................................................................................... 88
Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 89
Manufacturing master data ..................................................................................................................... 90
Item - production ................................................................................................................................. 90
Exercise 4.1: Activate direct processing for materials ........................................................................ 90
Production process with direct material issue ......................................................................................... 92
Create production order ...................................................................................................................... 92
Control production using JSC Operator Workbench ........................................................................... 92
Scenario: Production process with direct material issue .................................................................... 96
Exercise 4.2: Create production order ................................................................................................ 97
Exercise 4.3: Print order documents and release order ..................................................................... 98
Exercise 4.4: Control production using JSC Operator Workbench ..................................................... 99
Exercise 4.5: Report order completed .............................................................................................. 104
Exercise 4.6: Close production order ................................................................................................ 105
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 107
Lesson 5: Production with backflushing .............................................................................................. 108
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 109
Manufacturing master data ................................................................................................................... 110
Item – production .............................................................................................................................. 110
Operations ......................................................................................................................................... 110
Exercise 5.1: Enable and activate backflushing ............................................................................... 110
Production process with backflushing ................................................................................................... 113
Create production order .................................................................................................................... 113
Report order completed/backflush materials and hours ................................................................... 113
Scenario: Production process with backflushing .............................................................................. 113
Exercise 5.2: Create production order .............................................................................................. 114
Exercise 5.3: Print order documents and release order ................................................................... 116
Exercise 5.4: Report order completed .............................................................................................. 117
Exercise 5.5: Close production order ................................................................................................ 118
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 120
Lesson 6: Subcontracting ...................................................................................................................... 121
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 122
Subcontracting without material flow support ................................................................................... 122
Subcontracting with material flow support ........................................................................................ 122
Master data for subcontracting .............................................................................................................. 123
Implemented software components .................................................................................................. 123

4 Table of contents
 Business partner data ....................................................................................................................... 123
Warehouse data ................................................................................................................................ 124
Warehousing procedures and order types ........................................................................................ 124
Default order type by origin ............................................................................................................... 124
Purchase order type .......................................................................................................................... 124
Demo 6.1: Review subcontracting setup and master data ............................................................... 124
Item – purchase data ........................................................................................................................ 129
Subcontracting model ....................................................................................................................... 129
Work centers ..................................................................................................................................... 130
Items ................................................................................................................................................. 130
Warehouse - item data ...................................................................................................................... 131
BOM and routing ............................................................................................................................... 131
Subcontracting rates ......................................................................................................................... 131
Calculate standard costs ................................................................................................................... 132
Validate subcontracting settings ....................................................................................................... 132
Exercise 6.2: Create item – purchase data ....................................................................................... 133
Exercise 6.3: Define subcontracting model ...................................................................................... 134
Exercise 6.4: Create a work center ................................................................................................... 136
Exercise 6.5: Define items ................................................................................................................ 137
Exercise 6.6: Define warehouse – item data .................................................................................... 142
Exercise 6.7: Define BOM and routing.............................................................................................. 144
Exercise 6.8: Define subcontracting rates ........................................................................................ 146
Exercise 6.9: Calculate standard cost............................................................................................... 147
Exercise 6.10: Validate subcontracting settings ............................................................................... 149
Production process with subcontracting ............................................................................................... 151
Create production order .................................................................................................................... 151
Print production order documents and release production order ..................................................... 151
Report operations completed ............................................................................................................ 151
Generate and approve subcontracting purchase order .................................................................... 151
Issue subcontracting material ........................................................................................................... 152
Receive purchase order .................................................................................................................... 153
Report operations complete .............................................................................................................. 153
Exercise 6.11: Create production order, print documents and release order, and post subassembly
to inventory ........................................................................................................................................ 153
Exercise 6.12: Generate and approve subcontracting purchase order ............................................ 157
Exercise 6.13: Issue subcontracting material ................................................................................... 159
Exercise 6.14: Receive purchase order ............................................................................................ 161
Exercise 6.15: Report operation complete, report order complete, and close order ........................ 164
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 167
Lesson 7: Production using order groups ........................................................................................... 168
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 169
Enterprise Planning order groups ..................................................................................................... 169
JSC order groups .............................................................................................................................. 169
Production using order groups process flow ..................................................................................... 170
Scenario: Production using order groups ......................................................................................... 171
Enterprise Planning order groups ......................................................................................................... 172
Create order groups in Enterprise Planning ..................................................................................... 172
View planned order group details ..................................................................................................... 173
Confirm planned orders .................................................................................................................... 174
Transfer planned orders .................................................................................................................... 175
Scenario: Create EP order group and transfer to JSC order group .................................................. 175
Demo 7.1: Update parameters for order grouping ............................................................................ 175

5 Table of contents
 Exercise 7.2: Create new items ........................................................................................................ 176
Exercise 7.3: Create planned production orders .............................................................................. 178
Exercise 7.4: Create order group for planned production orders ..................................................... 179
Exercise 7.5: Confirm and transfer planned orders .......................................................................... 181
Production process using JSC order groups ........................................................................................ 184
View production order groups ........................................................................................................... 185
Report operations completed by order group ................................................................................... 185
Report orders completed globally ..................................................................................................... 185
Close production orders .................................................................................................................... 185
Scenario: Complete production using JSC order groups.................................................................. 186
Exercise 7.6: Print and release production orders ............................................................................ 186
Exercise 7.7: Report operations completed ...................................................................................... 188
Exercise 7.8: Report orders completed globally ............................................................................... 189
Exercise 7.9: Close production orders .............................................................................................. 190
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 192
Lesson 8: Unit effectivity ........................................................................................................................ 194
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 195
Concepts in unit effectivity ................................................................................................................ 195
How to use unit effectivity ................................................................................................................. 196
Unit effectivity and production order completion ............................................................................... 196
Set up unit effectivity ............................................................................................................................. 197
Implemented software components .................................................................................................. 198
Items – effectivity series .................................................................................................................... 198
Effectivity units .................................................................................................................................. 199
Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 200
Item – requirements .......................................................................................................................... 200
BOM and routing operations ............................................................................................................. 200
Scenario: Set up item with unit effectivity ......................................................................................... 201
Demo 8.1: Check parameters ........................................................................................................... 201
Exercise 8.2: Copy items .................................................................................................................. 203
Exercise 8.3: Create items – effectivity series .................................................................................. 208
Exercise 8.4: Create a requirement .................................................................................................. 210
Exercise 8.5: Maintain BOM and routing .......................................................................................... 211
Exercise 8.6: Calculate standard cost............................................................................................... 217
Logistics process using unit effectivity .................................................................................................. 218
Sales order procedure ...................................................................................................................... 218
Production order process .................................................................................................................. 218
Invoicing ............................................................................................................................................ 219
Scenario: Produce and sell an item with different effectivity units .................................................... 219
Exercise 8.7: Create and process a sales order ............................................................................... 220
Exercise 8.8: Create and process production orders ........................................................................ 223
Exercise 8.9: Generate and release outbound advice ...................................................................... 228
Exercise 8.10: Ship items ................................................................................................................. 229
Exercise 8.11: Create invoice ........................................................................................................... 230
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 232
Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning ................................................................................................. 233
Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 234
Tools planning and tracking .............................................................................................................. 234
Tools master data.................................................................................................................................. 235
Defining tools .................................................................................................................................... 235
Operations ......................................................................................................................................... 237
Exercise 9.1: Define a tool ................................................................................................................ 238

6 Table of contents
 Exercise 9.2: Define tool numbers and activate tools ....................................................................... 240
Exercise 9.3: Review and maintain operations ................................................................................. 241
Purchase and use of tools ..................................................................................................................... 243
Purchase orders ................................................................................................................................ 244
Estimated tool requirements ............................................................................................................. 244
Availability planning........................................................................................................................... 244
Request and return tools ................................................................................................................... 245
Report operations completed ............................................................................................................ 245
Tool number status ........................................................................................................................... 245
Scenario: Purchase and use tools .................................................................................................... 246
Exercise 9.4: Create purchase order for tools .................................................................................. 247
Exercise 9.5: Process production order ............................................................................................ 250
Exercise 9.6: Modify estimated tool requirements ............................................................................ 251
Exercise 9.7: Check availability planning .......................................................................................... 252
Exercise 9.8: Request tools .............................................................................................................. 253
Exercise 9.9: Report operations completed ...................................................................................... 254
Exercise 9.10: Check tool number status and return tool ................................................................. 255
Check your understanding .................................................................................................................... 258
Course summary ..................................................................................................................................... 259
Course review ....................................................................................................................................... 260
Appendices .............................................................................................................................................. 263
Appendix A: User accounts ................................................................................................................... 264
Appendix B: Check your understanding answers ................................................................................. 266
Lesson 1: Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 266
Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data............................................................................................... 266
Lesson 3: Production process with manual material issue ............................................................... 267
Lesson 4: Production process with direct material issue .................................................................. 267
Lesson 5: Production process with backflushing .............................................................................. 268
Lesson 6: Subcontracting ................................................................................................................. 269
Lesson 7: Order groups .................................................................................................................... 269
Lesson 8: Unit effectivity ................................................................................................................... 270
Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning .............................................................................................. 271
Course review ................................................................................................................................... 272

7 Table of contents
About this workbook
Welcome to this Infor Education course! We hope you will find this learning experience enjoyable and
instructive. This Training Workbook is designed to support the following forms of learning:
• Classroom instructor-led training with an Infor certified instructor
• Virtual classroom instructor-led training with an Infor certified instructor
• Self-directed learning through Infor Campus
This Training Workbook is not intended for use as a product user guide.

Workbook design
This Training Workbook contains both conceptual information to introduce topics and step-by-step
procedural instructions for practical application of those concepts.
Symbols and notes are provided throughout this Training Workbook for ease of reference. Refer to the
Symbols used in this workbook section below to familiarize yourself with these symbols.

Course training environment and demos/exercises

Instructor-led training (ILT)

If you are taking this course as ILT, your instructor will provide details on accessing the Infor Education
Training Environment needed to complete the student exercises. Your instructor will also assign you and
other students an account login and password from Appendix A of this Training Workbook.

Instructors will perform the demos outlined in this Training Workbook. If you are taking this
course as ILT, do not attempt to complete any steps within any demos; otherwise, it could
adversely affect the training environment, the intended flow of the course, and the success
and quality of the course for all students in the class.

Self-directed learning (SDL)

If you are taking this course via Infor Campus as SDL, refer to the Lab on Demand screen in the self-
directed learning course for course environment information. The Lab on Demand screen includes
instructions and logins to launch and access the corresponding Infor Education Training Environment as
well as logins and passwords required for completion of course exercises and demos.

The exercises and demos in this course build upon each other as they prepare the system for
subsequent exercises and demos. If you are taking this course as SDL, you must complete
all of the exercises and demos in the order they are presented in the Training Workbook. This
ensures you will achieve the expected results and a successful course outcome.

8 About this workbook

Instructor-recorded presentations and simulations (SDL only)
If you are taking this course as SDL, there may be instructor-recorded presentations and/or simulations
available to assist you.
If instructor-recorded presentations are available, a hyperlink to the recording will be included on the first
page of each corresponding lesson of the interactive workbook on the Training Workbook tab of the self-
directed learning course.
If simulations are available, the demos and exercises throughout the interactive Training Workbook will
include hyperlinks to simulations that allow you to view and/or practice the execution of the demo or
exercise. These same simulations are also accessible via the Demonstrations tab of the self-directed
learning course.

Learning Libraries
Learning Libraries in Infor Campus include learning materials that are available to you online, anytime,
anywhere. These materials can supplement instructor-led training, providing you with additional learning
resources to support your day-to-day business tasks and activities.
Please note that if you accessed this Training Workbook directly via a Learning Library, you will not have
access to the Infor Education Training Environment that is provided with all instructor-led and most self-
directed learning course versions, as referenced above. Therefore, you will not be able to practice the
exercises in the specific Training Environment for which the exercises in this Training Workbook were
written.

Symbols used in this workbook

Exercise Your notes Question

Demo Important note Answer

Scenario or Discussion Critical note Task simulation

For your reference

9 About this workbook

Course overview
Estimated time
.5 hours

Learning objectives
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:
• Describe manufacturing concepts.
• Explain how to create manufacturing master data.
• Describe the main elements and activities in the production process in Infor LN.
• Describe the main activities in the production process with direct material issue.
• Explain how to use backflushing in production.
• Explain how to use subcontracting in production.
• Explain how to use order groups in production.
• Explain how to use effectivity units in production.
• Explain how to maintain and use tools in production.

Topics
• Course description and agenda

10 Course overview
Course description and agenda
This course provides detailed information about the functionalities and features of Infor LN Manufacturing.
You will learn key Manufacturing topics like defining bills of material (BOMs), routings and tool
requirements, controlling the execution of production orders and subcontracting. This training is for
version Infor LN Cloud.

Prerequisite courses
LN: Foundation

Course duration
24 hours

Audience
• Customer User
• Pre-Sales Consultant
• Business Consultant
• Technical Consultant
• Support

System requirements
• Infor LN 10.7 Training Environment

Reference materials
Infor LN reference materials are available from the following locations:
• Infor LN Help menu
• Infor Support Portal®

Course agenda
The agenda below details the contents of this course, including lesson-level learning objectives and
supporting objectives.

Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated

time
(hours)

Course overview Review course expectations. .5

1 Introduction Describe manufacturing concepts. .5

• Describe the function of the Job Shop
Control (JSC) module in Infor LN.

11 Course overview
 Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

• Provide a functional overview of

production orders in Infor LN.

2 Manufacturing master data Explain how to create manufacturing master 4

data.
• Define fundamental manufacturing item
data.
• Explain how to create a BOM.
• Explain how to create shop floor data.
• Explain how to define routings.
• Explain how to perform cost price
calculations.

3 Production with manual Describe the main elements and activities in 2

material issue the production process in Infor LN.
• Identify the main activities in production
process with manual material issue.
• Explain how to create a production
order.
• Explain how to print production order
documents.
• Explain how to release a production
order.
• Explain how to initiate a material to
issue for a production order.
• Explain how to process outbound
advices.
• Explain how to report operations
completed.
• Explain how to post and process
production order hours.
• Explain how to report orders completed.
• Explain how to process warehouse
receipt for the finished product.
• Explain how to close a production
order.

12 Course overview
 Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

4 Production with direct Describe the main activities in the 1

material issue production process with direct material
issue.
• Explain how to activate direct
processing for materials.
• Explain how to create and process a
production order.
• Explain how to use the JSC Operator
Workbench.

5 Production with Explain how to use backflushing in 1

backflushing production.
• Explain the concept of backflushing.
• Explain how to maintain backflushing of
materials and hours.
• Explain how to process production
orders with backflushing.

6 Subcontracting Explain how to use subcontracting in 5

production.
• Explain how to maintain master data for
subcontracting.
• Explain how to process production
orders with subcontracted operations.

7 Production using order Explain how to use order groups in 2

groups production.
• Describe the purpose of order groups in
Enterprise Planning.
• Explain how to process order groups in
Enterprise Planning.
• Describe the purpose of order groups in
the JSC module.
• Explain how to process order groups in
the JSC module.

8 Unit effectivity Explain how to use effectivity units in 2

production.

13 Course overview
 Lesson Lesson title Learning objectives Estimated
time
(hours)

• Explain how to maintain items with unit

effectivity.
• Explain how to maintain effectivity units.
• Explain how to maintain requirements.
• Explain how to add exceptions to BOMs
and routings.
• Explain how to process orders with
different effectivity units.

9 Tools requirement planning Explain how to maintain and use tools in 1.5
production.
• Describe tools master data.
• Explain how to process purchase of
tools.
• Explain how to use tools in production
orders.

Course summary Debrief course. .5

Appendices
This section contains information that is not part of the instructional content of this course, but it provides
additional related reference information.

Appendix Appendix title Content description

Appendix A User accounts This appendix provides a reference for student and instructor
login credentials.

Appendix B Check your This appendix provides answers to the check your
understanding understanding questions found at the end of each lesson.
answers

14 Course overview
Lesson 1: Introduction
Estimated time
.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe manufacturing concepts. In this lesson, you will:
• Describe the function of the Job Shop Control (JSC) module in Infor LN.
• Provide a functional overview of production orders in Infor LN.

Topics
• Overview
• Business case

15 Lesson 1: Introduction
Overview
You can use Infor LN Manufacturing for the Cloud to manage the production of items. With
Manufacturing, you can:
• Define bills of material (BOMs), routings, and tool requirements.
• Calculate cost and sales prices.
• Plan projects and carry out network planning.
• Control the execution of production orders.
• Configure large numbers of variants of finished products with CPQ Configurator set up.
• Plan and generate assembly orders.
Infor LN Manufacturing for the Cloud also contains functionality for:
• Mass BOM changes
• Product classification
• Repetitive production
• Definition of customized items

Job Shop Control module

The Infor LN JSC module handles the creation of production orders, planning of production orders, and
the procedure related to the execution of these orders.
You can manually create and modify production orders in the JSC module. To create production orders
automatically, you must use Infor LN Enterprise Planning.
At the macro level, the production process consists of the following activities and procedures:
• Availability of materials and capacity
• Determining the order sequence
• Providing the necessary information through the help of various documents to the operators in the
job shop
• Recording all transactions of issuing material
• Receiving the finished product in the warehouse
In addition, the time spent by a worker on a production order is also recorded, so the actual cost of a
production order and the production efficiency can be obtained.
The JSC module can also be used to:
• Re-plan production orders, especially to alter the timing of operations to take account of delays
and changes in priorities.
• Subcontract operations, if you are unable to complete certain operations yourself.

Production orders - functional overview

A production order comprises the order to produce an item and the conditions under which manufacturing
takes place, such as the routing that is used, the delivery date, and the order quantity.
A production order can be used for:
• Production of anonymous items
• Standard-to-order production
• Production of customized items

16 Lesson 1: Introduction
Origin of production orders
A production order is usually generated by a planning algorithm, such as master-based planning or order-
based planning, and is subsequently transferred to a manufacturing module.
You can manually define production orders in the Production Orders (tisfc0501m000) session in
Manufacturing. However, production orders generally originate from one of these Infor LN packages:
• Enterprise Planning
• Warehousing
Orders generated in Enterprise Planning and Warehousing are transferred to the Production Orders
session.

Processing new production orders

When a new production order is created, the master data for the product is copied from the company
level to the site where production takes place.

Production order status

Production orders go through a number of order statuses, for example:
• Created
• Documents Printed
• Released
The order status determines which actions can be performed on a production order.

Estimated and actual costs

The estimated costs for a production order are based on the BOM and the routing (estimated costing).
During production, the hours that are actually spent and the materials that are actually used are posted
(actual costing). When the production order is closed, the result of the production order is calculated.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

17 Lesson 1: Introduction
Business case
In this course, you will learn the fundamentals of configuring Infor LN Manufacturing for the Cloud by
using a business case: manufacturing items for “Cell Electronics,” a worldwide smartphone company that
manufactures, purchases, and distributes smartphones and components.

Scenario: Manufacturing for a smartphone company

In our business case, you are an engineer at Cell Electronics who is involved in producing
the company’s newest smartphones.
As such, you will perform several activities related to the production of these new
smartphones as outlined in multiple scenarios throughout this course, including:
• Maintain manufacturing master data
• Production with manual material issue
• Production with direct material issue
• Backflushing
• Production with subcontracting
• Production with order groups
• Production with unit effectivity
• Tools requirement planning

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

18 Lesson 1: Introduction
Check your understanding

What is a production order in Infor LN?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

How are production orders originated in Infor LN?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

19 Lesson 1: Introduction
Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data
Estimated time
4 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to create manufacturing master data. In this
lesson, you will:
• Define fundamental manufacturing item data.
• Explain how to create a BOM.
• Explain how to create shop floor data.
• Explain how to define routings.
• Explain how to perform cost price calculations.

Topics
• Overview
• Items
• Bill of material
• Shop floor design and routing
• Cost price calculation

20 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how to create fundamental master data that you will use throughout the
course by performing the following activities in the manufacturing master data flow:

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

21 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Items
In a company, engineers are responsible for the development of new products. They also maintain and
improve the products during their life cycles. Therefore, engineers must have item-related data at their
disposal, for example, to determine the item structure, how the item is manufactured, and which purchase
and production processes are involved. Their goal is to carry out continuous development without
disturbing the production process and other logistical processes.

Create new items

You can use either of the following sessions to view, maintain, and create item-related data:
• Items (tcibd0501m000)
• Production Item 360 (timfc1500m000)
Depending on the item type, you can click buttons available in the Subentities section of the Items
session to open the corresponding session to specify item data by subentity.
The Production Item 360 session offers additional benefits like direct links to the BOM or routing of a
finished good.

Item – production
Production data must be defined for items that are used in Manufacturing. You can use the Item
Production (tiipd0101m000) session to define, list, and maintain item settings for production.
In this course, when creating manufactured items, you will select the Direct Process Warehouse Order
Line check box on the Job Shop Process tab of the Item – Production session.
• If this check box is selected, the warehouse outbound procedure is automatically initiated, after
material is unblocked in the warehouse.
• If this check box is cleared, and you unblock warehouse order lines using the Initiate Inventory
Issue (tisfc0207m000) session:
o The quantity to issue is added to the value specified in the To Issue by Warehousing field in
the Material to Issue for Production Orders (ticst0101m100) details session.
o You must then manually carry out the remainder of the warehousing procedure.
If you use the Initiate Inventory Issue (tisfc0207m000) session, warehouse order lines for the materials to
issue are unblocked. Alternatively, you can select the Direct Initiate Inventory Issue check box for the
materials, which means that the warehouse order lines are automatically unblocked when the production
order is released.

Item – purchase
You can use the Item - Purchase (tiipd0101m000) session to view, specify, and maintain the global item
purchase data, which is required to purchase the item, including the purchase price.
Item purchase data can be specified only if the corresponding global item data is defined in the Items
(tcibd0501m000) session.

Item – ordering
You can use the Item - Ordering (tcibd2100m000) session to view, specify, and maintain the global item
ordering data, which is required to order the item.

22 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

The item ordering data includes:
• Limits for the quantities that can be ordered
• Default values that Infor LN uses to generate the orders
Item ordering data can be specified only if the corresponding global item data is defined in the Items
session.

Order method
The order method field in the Item – Ordering session controls the ordered quantities of recommended
purchase and production orders. The available options in this field are:
• Lot-for-lot
• Economic order quantity (EOQ)
• Fixed order quantity
• Replenish to maximum quantity
In our scenario we will use the EOQ order method for our manufactured items. The EOQ method
specifies the amount of an item to be purchased or manufactured at one time. This amount is the quantity
for which the combined costs of acquiring and carrying inventory are the lowest. This is also referred to as
the minimum cost order quantity.

Scenario: Create new items

As part of our business case, in this scenario, you will create the following items that will be
used to produce the Circa S100 smartphone for Cell Electronics:
• Manufactured items:
• S100 - Smartphone Circa
• S110 - Smartphone Cover Blue
• S130 - SIM Card
• Purchased items:
• S111 - Granulate
• S112 - Blue Color
• S120 - Storage Battery 20
• S121 - Storage Battery 21
• S131 - Software
• S132 - SIM card (without programming)

23 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Exercise 2.1: Log in to Infor LN
In this exercise, you will log in to the Infor LN application.

Before you begin:

Note: Your instructor will assign user account logins and passwords from Appendix A of this
Training Workbook.

Verify you are logged in to the Training Desktop. If not, log in following instructions provided
by your course instructor.
Note: If you are taking this course as self-directed learning, follow the instructions on the
course Lab On Demand screen.

Exercise steps
1. Double-click the Infor OS (TRN) icon on the training desktop. The Infor CloudIdenttites – Sign
On screen opens.
2. Type [the Infor LN training user name provided to you by your instructor; e.g., 3014st01@infor-
edu.com] in the User Name field. For example: gdeinfor2\1004st08.
3. Type [the Infor LN password provided to you by your instructor] in the Password field.
4. Click the Sign in button. The Welcome to Infor Ming.leTM homepage displays. Note: Click the
Not for this site button if you receive a prompt to store your password.

For best results during this course, you will need to expand both your training
desktop and the window in which Infor Ming.le displays. This ensures that visible
content displays properly.
• Click the Fit to window icon (resembles a monitor with a diagonal arrow) in the
Skytap header bar. This expands the desktop to a full-screen display.
• Click the arrow tab in the Skytap header bar to collapse it.
• Click once on the title bar of the Homepages window.
• Press F11. This expands the window to a full-screen display.

5. Click the App Menu (nine white squares) icon in the upper-left corner of the screen.
6. Click the LN (mechanical arm) icon. The Infor LN application opens.
Note: If the context application panel displays on the right side of the screen, click the right-facing
chevron in the upper-right corner to collapse the panel.

24 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Exercise 2.2: Create new items
In this exercise, you will create purchased and manufactured items.

Before you begin:

• Note: Your instructor will assign user account logins and passwords from Appendix A of
this Training Workbook.

Part 1: Create purchased items [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112

1. Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
2. Click the New button. The Items detail session opens.
3. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Substitute the last two characters of your assigned student user ID (e.g. 01)
whenever you see [XX] in an exercise. For example, in this exercise part, user
3006st04 would type 01-S111 for the first item name. Refer to Appendix A for user
login information.

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S111

Description Granulate

Item Type Purchased

4. Click the Zoom button in the Item Group field. The Items window opens with the Item Groups
radio button selected.
5. Click the OK button. The Item Groups session opens.
6. Click to select the check box for PUR001 in the Item Groups session. Note: You may need to
scroll down to see this item group.
7. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
8. Click the Order System drop-down arrow.
9. Click the Planned list item. The values in the Unit Set and the Inventory Unit fields are
automatically populated based on the selected item group.
10. Review the values in the Unit Set and Inventory Unit fields. The values are 001 and kg.
11. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Costing
• Ordering

25 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 • Production
• Purchase
12. Click the Details tab.
13. Review the check boxes in the Traceability section. Both check boxes are cleared.
14. Click the General tab.
15. Click the Production button. The Item – Production session opens.
16. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
17. Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is cleared.
18. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
19. Click the Purchase button. The Items - Purchase session opens.
20. Type 100 in the Purchase Price field in the Price section. Note: You may have to scroll down to
see this field.
21. Click the Save button. The Item-Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Latest
Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
22. Click the Yes button. The Item-Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Average
Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
23. Click the Yes button.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Purchase session. The Items detail
session displays.
25. Click the Save button, if necessary.
26. Click the New button.
27. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S112

Description Blue Color

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR001

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit kg

Repeat steps 11 through 25 for item [XX]-112.

26 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Part 2: Create purchased items [XX]-S120 and [XX]-S121
Click the New button.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S120

Description Storage Battery 20

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

3. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Costing
• Ordering
• Production
• Purchase
4. Click the Details tab.
5. Review the check boxes in the Traceability section. Both check boxes are cleared.
6. Click the General tab.
7. Click the Production button. The Item – Production session opens.
8. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
9. Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is selected.
10. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
11. Click the Purchase button. The Item - Purchase session opens.
12. Type 2 in the Purchase Price field.
13. Click the Save button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Latest
Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
14. Click the Yes button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace
Average Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
15. Click the Yes button.

27 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Purchase session. The Items detail
session displays.
17. Click the Save button, if necessary.
18. Click the New button.
19. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S121

Description Storage Battery 21

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

Repeat steps 3-17 for item [XX]-S121.

Part 3: Create purchased items [XX]-S131 and [XX]-S132

1. Click the New button.
2. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S131

Description Software

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

28 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field or check box Value

Inventory Unit ea

3. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Costing
• Ordering
• Production
• Purchase
4. Click the Production button. The Item – Production session opens.
5. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
6. Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is selected.
7. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
8. Click the Purchase button. The Item - Purchase session opens.
9. Type 1 in the Purchase Price field.
10. Click the Save button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Latest
Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
11. Click the Yes button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace
Average Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
12. Click the Yes button.
13. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Purchase session. The Items detail
session displays.
14. Click the Save button, if necessary.
15. Click the New button.
16. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S132

Description SIM Card (without

programming)

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Planned

29 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field or check box Value

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

17. Repeat steps 3-14 for item [XX]-S132.

18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays, and your six new items display.
Note: Do not close the Items session.

Part 4: Review purchased items

1. Click Procurement > Master Data > Items > Items – Purchase.
2. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
3. Press Enter to filter the results.
4. Press CTRL+A to select the check boxes for all of your purchased items in the Item column
([XX]-S111, [XX]-S112, [XX]-S120, [XX]-S121, [XX]-S131, and [XX]-S132).
5. Click the References menu.
6. Click the Item Actual Purchase Prices menu item. The Item Actual Purchase Prices session
opens.
7. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
8. Press Enter to filter the results.
9. Verify the following values are displayed in the Average Purchase Price and Latest Purchase
Price fields for your created items:
• Items [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112 = 100.00 USD
• Items [XX]-S120 and [XX]-S121 = 2.00 USD
• Items [XX]-S131 and [XX]-S132 = 1.00 USD
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item Actual Purchase Prices session. The
Items – Purchase session displays.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items – Purchase session. The Items
session displays.

Part 5: Create manufactured items [XX]-S100, [XX]-S110, and [XX]-S130

1. Click the New button. The Items detail session opens.
2. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S100

30 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field or check box Value

Description Smartphone Circa

Item Type Manufactured

Item Group MFG001

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

3. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Planning
• Costing
• Ordering
• Sales
• Production
4. Click the Ordering button. The Item - Ordering session opens.
5. Click the Lot Sizes tab.
6. Type 50 in the Economic Order Quantity field.
7. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
8. Click the Production button. The Item – Production session opens.
9. Click the Job Shop BOM tab.
10. Review the production data for the item on the Job Shop BOM tab.
11. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
12. Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is selected.
13. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
14. Click the Save button.
15. Click the New button.
16. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S110

31 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field or check box Value

Description Smartphone Cover Blue

Item Type Manufactured

Item Group MFG002

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

17. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Planning
• Costing
• Ordering
• Production
18. Click the Ordering button. The Item - Ordering session opens.
19. Click the Lot Sizes tab.
20. Type 100 in the Economic Order Quantity field.
21. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
22. Click the Production button. The Item – Production session opens.
23. Click the Job Shop BOM tab.
24. Review the production data for the item on the Job Shop BOM tab.
25. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
26. Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is selected.
27. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
28. Click the Save button.
29. Click the New button.
30. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S130

32 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field or check box Value

Description SIM Card

Item Type Manufactured

Item Group MFG002

Order System Planned

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

31. Repeat steps 17-28 for item [XX]-S130.

32. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.
33. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
34. Press Enter to apply the filter. Your created items display.
35. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

33 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Bill of material
Production Item 360 session
When you select an item in the item list in the Production Item 360 session, the check marks in the
Detailed Information section indicate which data is available for the item. If you click a link in this section,
a session is started in which you can view, maintain, or create the item data, including the BOM.

Bill of material
The Bill of Material (tibom1110m000) session is used to define the BOM for a manufactured or a
purchased item.
The BOM:
• Identifies the product structure of an item, including the components, raw materials, and sub-
assemblies required to complete an end item.
• Indicates the quantity of each of the parts to make the end item.
• Is either single level or multi-level.
o A single level BOM:
▪ Displays the components directly related to the parent item.
▪ Only shows the relationship one level down from the parent.
o A multi-level BOM shows all component levels of the parent item, including other
components that are end items themselves with a BOM.

Scenario: Create BOM

As part of our business case, you will create a multilevel BOM for the Circa S100
smartphone, as shown in the following diagram:

34 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 After creating the BOM, you will review the multilevel BOM structure, then replace item S120
Storage Battery 20 in the BOM with the new model (item S121 Storage Battery 21), to create
the final BOM structure, as shown in the following diagram:

In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

35 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Exercise 2.3: Create BOM
In this exercise, you will create a standard bill of material for the manufactured items, then
you will replace an item in the BOM.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed Exercise 1.1 because it provides data or configurations for
this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create the BOM for item [XX]-S100

1. Click Options > Run Program. The Run Program window opens.
2. Type timfc1500m000 in the Open field.
3. Click the OK button. The Production Item 360 session opens.
4. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
5. Press Enter to apply the filter.
6. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
7. Click the Bill of Material link in the Detailed Information section. The Bill of Material session
opens.
8. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 populated in the Position field.
9. Type [XX]-S110 in the second segment of the Item field.
10. Type 1 in the Net Quantity field.
11. Click the Calendar icon in the Effective Date field. A calendar displays with the current month
and year visible.
12. Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.
13. Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
14. Click the Save button.
15. Click the New button. A new line displays with 20 populated in the Position field.
16. Type [XX]-S120 in the second segment of the Item field.
17. Repeat steps 10 through 14 for line 20.
18. Click the New button. A new line is added with 30 populated in the Position field.
19. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item field.
20. Repeat steps 10 through 14 for line 30.
21. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session. The Production
Item 360 session displays. The check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column is still selected, and
a green check mark now displays next to the Bill of Material link.

36 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Part 2: Create the BOM for item [XX]-S110
1. Click to clear the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
2. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S110 in the Item column.
3. Click the Bill of Material link. The Bill of Material session opens.
4. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 in the Position field.
5. Type [XX]-S111 in the second segment of the Item field.
6. Type 0.01 in the Net Quantity field.
7. Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field. A calendar displays with
the current month and year visible.
8. Click to select the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.
9. Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
10. Click the Save button.
11. Click the New button. A new line displays with 20 in the Position field.
12. Type [XX]-S112 in the second segment of the Item field.
13. Repeat steps 6 through 10 for line 20.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session. The Production
Item 360 session displays. The check box for [XX]-S110 in the Item column is still selected, and
a green check mark now displays next to the Bill of Material link.

Part 3: Create the BOM for item [XX]-S130

1. Click to clear the check box for [XX]-S110 in the Item column.
2. Click the Item Type filter column drop-down arrow.
3. Click the Manufactured list item. The filtered results display.
4. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S130 in the Item column.
5. Click the Bill of Material link. The Bill of Material session displays.
6. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 populated in the Position field.
7. Type [XX]-S131 in the second segment of the Item field.
8. Type 1 in the Net Quantity field.
9. Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field. A calendar displays with
the current month and year visible.
10. Click to select the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.
11. Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
12. Click the Save button.
13. Click the New button. A new line displays with 20 populated in the Position field.
14. Type [XX]-S132 in the second segment of the Item field.
15. Repeat steps 8 through 12 for line 20.

37 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session. The Production
Item 360 session displays. The check box for [XX]-S130 in the Item column is still selected, and
a green check mark now displays next to the Bill of Material link.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Item 360 session.

Part 4: Review the BOM structure

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Bill of Material. The Bill of Material
session opens.
2. Click the Search button. The Bill of Material – Search window opens with the Main Item,
Position, Sequence Number radio button selected.
3. Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Manufactured Item field.
4. Click the OK button. The Bill of Material session displays with [XX]-S100 displayed in the
second segment of the Main Item field in the header. The associated BOM lines for item [XX]-
S100 display in the list view.
5. Review the BOM lines.
6. Click the Views menu.
7. Click the Multilevel View menu item. The Multilevel View session opens.
8. Click the + sign for item [XX]-S110. The line expands to display the BOM lines defined for item
[XX]-S110.
9. Click the + sign for item [XX]-S130. The line expands to display the BOM lines defined for item
[XX]-S130.
10. Review the BOM lines for items [XX]-S110 and [XX]-S130.
11. Click the Close (X) button to close the Multilevel View window. The Bill of Material session
displays.

Part 5: Replace item in BOM

1. Click to select the check box for 20 in the Position column.
2. Click the Actions menu.
3. Click the Replace menu item. The Replace Item in Bill of Material session opens.
4. Verify [XX]-S120 displays in the second segment of the Item to be Replaced field.
5. Type [XX]-S121 in the second segment of the Replacement Item field.
6. Click to select the following check boxes:
• Retain Original Item
• Retain BOM Warehouse and Scrap
7. Click the Replace button. The Select Device session opens.
8. Click the Display tab.
9. Type D in the Device field.
10. Click the Continue button. The Replace Item in Bill of Material dialog box opens with the
message: “1 production BOM line(s) expired. 1 production BOM line(s) added.”

38 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 11. Click the OK button. The status message “No errors found for report. No report is printed”
displays in the lower-left section of the Replacement Item in Bill of Material session.
12. Click the Close button to close the Replacement Item in Bill of Material session. The Bill of
Material session displays.
13. Click the Views menu.
14. Click the Show All Lines menu option. The list view updates to reflect the selected view.
15. Review the updated list view.
Note: Notice that the discontinued BOM line for item [XX]-S120 is visible in this view.
16. Click the Views menu.
17. Click the Multilevel View menu item. The Multilevel View session opens.
18. Review the contents of the Multilevel View session. Notice that the discontinued BOM line for
item [XX]-S120 is also visible in this view (with a grey font color).
19. Click the Close (X) button to close the Multilevel View window. The Bill of Material session
displays.
20. Click to select the Position 10 check box.
21. Click the Views menu.
22. Click the Where-Used Component menu item. The Where-Used Component session opens.
23. Review the contents of the Where-Used Component session.
• [XX]-S110 displays in the second segment of the Component field in the header.
• [XX]-S100 displays in the Manufactured Item column in the BOM tab list view.
Note: This means that the selected item [XX]-S110 is used as a component in the BOM for item
[XX]-S100.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Where-Used Component session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

39 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Shop floor design and routing
In this part of the manufacturing master data flow, all necessary data for the routings of manufactured
goods are created, including:
• Work centers
• Employees
• Machines
• Tasks
• Routings

Work centers
A work center designates an area where work is performed. Work centers are grouped by one or more
employees and/or similar machines or processes. For capacity and costing calculations, a work center
can be considered as one unit.
To manage work centers, you can use the following sessions:
• Use the Work Centers (tirou0101m000) session to view and create work centers.
• Use the Work Center (tirou0101s000) session to manage detailed information for a specific work
center.

Employees
You can use the Employees – General (tccom0101m000) session to:
• Define and maintain general employee data.
• Assign an employee to a work center.
• Register labor costs for actual cost calculation.
You can use the Employees - People (bpmdm0101m000) session to maintain personal data such as
address, first date of employment, and working time schedule. This session be started by clicking the
Employee – People Data button in the Employment section of the Employees – General detail session.
In our scenario, you will define a working time schedule of 40 hours, and you will set the first date of
employment to January 1st of the current year.

Machines
In Infor LN, a machine is a mechanical object on which operations can be carried out to produce items.
Machines are linked to operation rates. The operation rate combined with the labor rate forms the basis
for the actual costing of production orders.
You can use the Machines (Machine Types) (tirou0102m000) session to select or enter a machine, and to
maintain machine data for a specific site. This data includes the rate for the machine costs and the
machine capacity.
Whether or not the machine rate data is used for the actual costing of production orders depends on the
setting of the Process Hours Using field, which is located in the Production Order Parameters
(tisfc0100s000) session. If the Process Hours Using field is set to Actual Man and Machine Rates, actual
costing is based on the machine rate that is defined in Production Order Parameters session and the
labor rates from the Employees - General session.

40 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

From the References menu in the Machines (Machine Types) detail session, you can choose from
several menu options, as described in the following table:

Menu option Description

Tools Select this option to start the Machine - Tools (tirou0110m000)

session.

Where-Used Select this option to start the Routing Operations (tirou1102m000)

session, which enables you to view the routing operation(s) in which
a specific machine is used.

Task Relationships Select this option to start the Task Relationships (tirou0104m000)
session, in which you can list and maintain relationships between
tasks, machines, and work centers.

Tasks
You can use the asks (Reference Operations) (tirou0603m000) overview session to maintain the data
pertaining to tasks.
A task:
• Is an activity to manufacture or repair an item, for example, sawing, drilling, or painting.
• Is carried out on a work center and can be related to a machine.
You can use the Tasks (Reference Operations) (tirou0103m000) detail session to maintain the data
pertaining to machine operations. Reference operation data serves as default data for recording
operations in the Infor LN Routing and Product Configuration modules.

Routings
You can use the Item - Routings (tirou1101m000) session to:
• List, define, and maintain routing codes for item specific routings and standard routing.
• Define multiple routings (by assigning multiple routing codes to an item and site combination).
• Define alternative routings or order quantity dependent routings.
A routing code:
• Is a code that is linked to a routing.
• Can be linked to a standard routing or an item-specific routing.
Throughout this course you will use the standard routing with routing code 001.

41 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Scenario: Define shop floor design and routing
As part of our business case, you will define the shop floor design and routing for the Circa
S100 smartphone, as shown in the following diagram:

In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

42 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Exercise 2.4: Create shop floor data
In this exercise, you will create and configure shop floor data, including production work
centers, employees, machines, and tasks.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create work centers [XX]-10 through [XX]-40

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Shop Layout > Work Centers.
2. Click the New button. The Work Centers detail session opens with Work Center populated in
the Work Center Type field.
3. Type [XX]-10 in the Work Center field.
4. Type Smartphone Assembly in the Description field.
5. Click the Zoom button in the Production Department field. The Production Departments
session opens.
6. Click to select the check box for 001 in the Department column.
7. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
8. Press Tab.
9. Verify the following fields are populated with the following data:
• Address: ADD000001
• City (Letterhead): Alpharetta
10. Click the Zoom button in the Enterprise Unit field. The Enterprise Units session opens.
11. Click to select the check box for 001 in the Enterprise Unit column.
12. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
13. Click the Zoom button in the Work Center Calendar field. The Calendar Code session opens.
14. Click to select the check box for STD in the Calendar Code column.
15. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
16. Press Tab.
17. Click the Zoom button in the Working Hours field. The Calendar Availability Types session
opens.
18. Click to select the check box for GEN in the Availability Type column.
19. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
20. Click the Relationships tab.

43 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 21. Click the Zoom button in the Operation Rate Code field. The Operation Rate Codes session
opens.
22. Click to select the check box for P001 in the Operation Rate Code column.
23. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
24. Click the Planning tab.
25. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Basic Week Capacity 40

Basic Day Capacity 8

Number of Machines 1

Available Labor Resources 1

26. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
27. Verify the check box for [XX]-10 in the Work Center column is selected.
28. Click the Duplicate button. The Work Centers detail session opens with Work Center populated
in the Work Center Type field.
29. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Work Center [XX]-20

Description Injection Molding

Production Department 001

Address ADD000001

City (Letterhead) Alpharetta

Enterprise Unit 001

Work Center Calendar STD

(first segment)

44 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Work Center Calendar GEN

(second segment)

30. Repeat steps 20-25 for work center [XX]-20.

31. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
32. Verify the check box for [XX]-20 in the Work Center column is selected.
33. Click the Duplicate button. The Work Centers detail session opens with Work Center populated
in the Work Center Type drop-down list.
34. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Work Center [XX]-30

Description Software Installation

Production Department 001

Address ADD000001

City (Letterhead) Alpharetta

Enterprise Unit 001

Work Center Calendar STD

(first segment)

Work Center Calendar GEN

(second segment)

35. Repeat steps 20 through 25 for work center [XX]-30.

36. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
37. Verify the check box for [XX]-30 in the Work Center column is selected.
38. Click the Duplicate button. The Work Centers detail session opens with Work Center populated
in the Work Center Type field.
39. Type [XX]-40 in the Work Center field.
40. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

45 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Work Center [XX]-40

Description Quality Management

Production Department 001

Address ADD000001

City (Letterhead) Alpharetta

Enterprise Unit 001

Work Center Calendar STD

(first segment)

Work Center Calendar GEN

(second segment)

41. Repeat steps 20 through 25 for work center [XX]-40.

42. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
43. Type [XX] in the first Work Center filter field.
44. Press Enter to apply filter. Your created production work centers display.
45. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers session.

Part 2: Create employees [XX]-10 through [XX]-40

1. Click Common > People > Master Data > Employees - General. The Employees – General
session opens.
2. Click the New button.
3. Type [XX]-10 in the first segment of the Employee field.
4. Type Smartphone Assembly in the second segment of the Employee field.
5. Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Department field. The Departments session
opens.
6. Type [XX]-10 in the first segment of the Department column filter field.
7. Press Enter to filter the results.
8. Click to select the check box for [XX]-10 in the Department column.
9. Click the OK button. The Employees - General session displays.
10. Press Tab. STD is automatically populated in the Labor Rate Code column.
11. Click the Zoom button in the Cost Component field. The Cost Components session opens.

46 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 12. Click to select the check box for 200 in the Cost Component column.
13. Click the OK button. The Employees - General session displays.
14. Click the Go to Details button for employee [XX]-10. The Employees – General detail session
opens.
15. Click the Employee - People Data button. The Employees – People session opens.
16. Type 40 in the Employment field.
17. Click the Calendar icon in the First Date of Employment field. A calendar displays with the
current month and year visible.
18. Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The First Date of Employment field
populates.
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees – People session. The
Employees – General detail session displays.
20. Click the Refresh button. A green check mark now displays next to the Employee – People
data button.
21. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees – General detail session. The
Employees – General session displays.
22. Verify the check box for [XX]-10 in the Employee column is selected.
23. Click the Duplicate button. A new line displays.
24. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Employee [XX]-20
(first segment)

Employee Injection Molding

(second segment)

Department [XX]-20

Labor Rate Code STD

Cost Component 200

25. Click the Go to Details button for employee [XX]-20. The Employees – General detail session
opens.
26. Repeat steps 15 through 20 for employee [XX]-20.
27. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees – General detail session. The
Employees – General session displays.
28. Verify the check box for [XX]-20 in the Employee column is selected.

47 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 29. Click the Duplicate button. A new line displays.
30. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Employee [XX]-30
(first segment)

Employee Software Installation

(second segment)

Department [XX]-30

Labor Rate Code STD

Cost Component 200

31. Click the Go to Details button for employee [XX]-30. The Employees – General detail session
opens.
32. Repeat steps 15 through 20 for employee [XX]-30.
33. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees – General detail session. The
Employees – General session displays.
34. Verify the check box for [XX]-30 in the Employee column is selected.
35. Click the Duplicate button. A new line displays.
36. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Employee [XX]-40
(first segment)

Employee Quality Management

(second segment)

Department [XX]-40

Labor Rate Code STD

Cost Component 200

37. Click the Go to Details button for employee [XX]-40. The Employees – General detail session
opens.

48 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 38. Repeat steps 15 through 20 for employee [XX]-40.
39. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees – General detail session. The
Employees – General session displays the new employees [XX]-10 through [XX]-40 in the list
view.
40. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Employees - General session.

Part 3: Assign the backflush employees for the work center

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Shop Layout > Work Centers. The Work Centers session
opens.
2. Click the Go to Details button for work center [XX]-10. The Work Centers detail session opens.
3. Click the Relationships tab.
4. Click the Zoom button in the Default Labor Resource field. The Employees – People session
opens.
5. Click to select [XX]-10 in the Employee column.
6. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
7. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
8. Click the Go to Details button for work center [XX]-20. The Work Centers detail session opens.
9. Repeat steps 3-4 for work center [XX]-20.
10. Click to select [XX]-20 in the Employee column.
11. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
13. Click the Go to Details button for work center [XX]-30. The Work Centers detail session opens
14. Repeat steps 3-4 for work center [XX]-30.
15. Click to select [XX]-30 in the Employee column.
16. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session. The Work
Centers session displays.
18. Click the Go to Details button for work center [XX]-40. The Work Centers detail session opens
19. Repeat steps 3-4 for work center [XX]-40.
20. Click to select [XX]-40 in the Employee column.
21. Click the OK button. The Work Centers detail session displays.
22. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session.
23. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers session.

Part 4: Create machines [XX]-20 and [XX]-30

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Shop Layout > Machines (Machine Types). The Machine
(Machine Types) session opens.

49 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 2. Click the New button. The Machines (Machine Types) detail session opens.
3. Type [XX]-20 in the first segment of the Machine field.
4. Type Injection Molding in the second segment of the Machine field.
5. Click the Zoom button in the Work Center field. The Work Centers session opens.
6. Click to select the check box for [XX]-20 in the Work Center column.
7. Click the OK button. The Machines (Machine Types) detail session displays.
8. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Machine Rate 60

Cost Component 300

Week Capacity 40

Day Capacity 8

9. Click the Save button.

10. Click the New button.
11. Type [XX]-30 in the first segment of the Machine field.
12. Type Computer in the second segment of the Machine field.
13. Type [XX]-30 in the Work Center field.
14. Repeat steps 8-9 for machine [XX]-30.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Machines (Machine Types) detail session.
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Machines (Machine Types) session.

Part 5: Create tasks [XX]-10 to [XX]-60

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Shop Layout > Tasks (Reference Operations). The Tasks
(References Operations) session opens.
2. Click the New button. The Tasks (Reference Operations) detail session displays.
3. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-10

Task (second segment) Assembly

50 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Work Center Selection Only Default

Method

Machine Selection Method All

Default Work Center [XX]-10

Click the References menu.

Click the Task Relationships menu option. The Task Relationships session opens.
Click the New button. The Task Relationships detail session opens.
Type Assembly / [XX]-10 in the Task Rel. Description field.
Verify 1 is populated in the Routing Quantity field.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Review the task relationship data.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Task Relationships detail session. The
Task Relationships session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Task Relationships session. The Tasks
(Reference Operations) detail session displays.
Click the New button.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-20

Task (second segment) Function Test

Work Center Selection All

Method

Machine Selection Method All

Default Work Center [XX]-40

Click the Save button.

Click the New button.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

51 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-30

Task (second segment) Injection Molding

Work Center Selection Only Default

Method

Machine Selection Method Only Default

Default Work Center [XX]-20

Default Machine [XX]-20

Click the References menu.

Click the Task Relationships menu option. The Task Relationships session opens.
Click the New button. The Task Relationships detail session opens.
Type Injection Molding / [XX]-20 in the Task Rel. Description field.
Verify that 1 is populated in the Routing Quantity field.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Review the task relationship data.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Task Relationships detail session. The
Task Relationships session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Task Relationships session. The Tasks
(Reference Operations) detail session displays.
Click the New button.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-40

Task (second segment) Implement Software

Work Center Selection All

Method

Machine Selection Method All

Default Work Center [XX]-30

52 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Default Machine [XX]-30

29. Click the Save button.

30. Click the New button.
31. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-50

Task (second segment) Set defaults

Work Center Selection All

Method

Machine Selection Method All

Default Work Center [XX]-30

Click the Save button.

Click the New button.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Task (first segment) [XX]-60

Task (second segment) Final test

Work Center Selection Only Default

Method

Machine Selection Method All

Default Work Center [XX]-40

Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tasks (Reference Operations) detail
session.
Verify the six new tasks are displayed.

53 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tasks (Reference Operations) session.

Exercise 2.5: Define routings

In this exercise, you will define the routing codes and the related operations for the items.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define routing for item [XX]-S100

1. Click Options > Run Program. The Run Program window opens.
2. Type timfc1500m000 in the Open field.
3. Click the OK button. The Production Item 360 session opens.
4. Type [XX]-S1 in the second segment of the Item filter field.
5. Press Enter to apply the filter.
6. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
7. Click the Routings link in the Detailed Information section. The Item - Routings session opens.
8. Click the New button. A new line displays with the following values automatically populated in the
following fields:

Field Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S100

Up to Quantity 99999999

Routing 001

9. Type Standard in the second segment of the Routing field.

10. Click the Save button.
11. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S100. The Routing Operations session opens.
12. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 populated in the Operation field.
13. Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Task field. The Tasks (Reference Operations)
session opens.
14. Click to select the check box for [XX]-10 in the Task column.

54 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 15. Click the OK button. The Routing Operations session displays.
16. Press Tab. [XX]-10 Smartphone Assembly is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
17. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 5

Cycle Time (min) 3

Effective Date [January 1st of the current

(first segment) year]

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

18. Click the Save button.

19. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
20. Verify 1 is populated in each of the following fields:
• Man Occupation for Setup
• Man Occupation for Production
21. Click the Operational tab.
22. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.
23. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
24. Click the New button. A new line displays with 20 populated in the Operation field.
25. Click the Zoom button in the Task field. The Tasks (Reference Operations) session opens.
26. Click to select the [XX]-20 check box in the Task column.
27. Click the OK button. The Routing Operations session displays.
28. Press Tab. [XX]-40 Quality Management is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
29. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 0

Cycle Time (min) 3

Effective Date [January 1st of the current year]

55 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

(first segment)

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

30. Click the Save button.

31. Click the Go to Details button for operation 20. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
32. Review the value in the Man Occupation for Setup field. The value is 0.
33. Verify 1 is populated in the Man Occupation for Production field.
34. Click the Operational tab.
35. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.
36. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
37. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session. The Item-
Routings session displays.

Part 2: Define routing for item [XX]-S110

1. Click the New button.
2. Type [XX]-S110 in the second segment of the Item field.
3. Press Tab. Several fields are populated.
4. Press Tab twice. Standard is automatically populated in the second segment of the Routing
field.
5. Click the Save button.
6. Click Go to Details button for item [XX]-S110. The Routing Operations session opens.
7. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 populated in the Operation field.
8. Type [XX]-30 in the first segment of the Task field.
9. Press Tab. [XX]-20 Injection Molding is automatically populated in each of the following fields:
• Work Center
• Machine
4. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 10

Cycle Time (min) 3

56 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Effective Date [January 1st of the current year]

(first segment)

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

11. Click the Save button.

12. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
13. Verify 1 is populated in the Man Occupation for Setup field.
14. Type 1 in the Man Occupation for Production field.
15. Press Tab. The Routing Operations dialog box opens with the message: “Recalculate Cycle
Time and Number of Machines?”
16. Click the Yes button.
17. Click the Operational tab.
18. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
20. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session. The Item -
Routings session displays.

Part 3: Define routing for item [XX]-S130

1. Click the New button. A new line displays.
2. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item field.
3. Press Tab. Several fields are automatically populated.
4. Press Tab twice more. Standard is automatically populated in the second segment of the
Routing field.
5. Click the Save button.
6. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130. The Routing Operations session opens.
7. Click the New button. A new line displays with 10 automatically populated in the Operation field.
8. Type [XX]-40 in the first segment of the Task field.
9. Press Tab. The following values are automatically populated in the following fields:

Field Value

Work Center [XX]-30 Software Installation

57 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Machine [XX]-30 Computer

10. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 10

Cycle Tim (min) 3

Effective Date [January 1st of the current

(first segment) year]

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

11. Click the Save button.

12. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
13. Verify 1 is displayed in each of the following fields:
• Man Occupation for Setup
• Man Occupation for Production
14. Click the Operational tab.
15. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
17. Click the New button. A new line displays with 20 populated in the Operation field.
18. Type [XX]-50 in the first segment of the Task field.
19. Press Tab. [XX]-30 Software Installation is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
20. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 0

Cycle Time (min) 6

58 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Field Value

Effective Date [January 1st of the current

(first segment) year]

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

21. Click the Save button.

22. Click the Go to Details button for operation 20. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
23. Review the value in the Man Occupation for Setup field. The value is 0.
24. Verify 1 is displayed in the Man Occupation for Production field.
25. Click the Operational tab.
26. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.
27. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
28. Click the New button. A new line displays with 30 in the Operation field.
29. Type [XX]-60 in the Task field.
30. Press Tab. [XX]-40 Quality Management is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
31. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field Value

Setup Time (min) 0

Cycle Tim (min) 3

Effective Date [January 1st of the current

(first segment) year]

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

32. Click the Save button.

33. Click the Go to Details button for operation 30. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
34. Review the value in the Man Occupation for Setup field. The value is 0.
35. Verify that 1 is populated in the Man Occupation for Production field.
36. Click the Operational tab.
37. Verify the Count Point check box is cleared.

59 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 38. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
39. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session. The Item -
Routings session displays.
40. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Routings session. The Production
Item 360 session displays. The check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column is selected, and a
green check mark now displays next to the Routings link.
41. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Item 360 session.

60 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Cost price calculation
Calculate cost and valuation prices
You can use the Calculate Standard Cost (ticpr2210m000) session to calculate the valuation price and
the cost price according to a price calculation code.
• The valuation price:
o Is the actual price of an item, which is used in all financial transactions that involve the item,
including:
▪ Cost price of sold goods
▪ Inventory transfer
▪ Issue to work-in-process value
o Must be distinguished from the cost price, which is used for other purposes.
o Is calculated by using one of the actual costing methods [Last In First Out (LIFO), First In
First Out (FIFO), Moving Average Unit Cost (MAUC), and Lot Price (Lot)], or by using a Fixed
Transfer Pricing (FTP) method.
• The cost price is the cost incurred by manufacturing or purchasing a single item (inventory
valuation).
• The cost price calculation code:
o Specifies how a cost price, valuation price, or sales price is calculated.
o Stores specific cost calculation data.
The price calculation code that is defined in the Cost Price Calculation (CPR) Parameters determines the
standard cost price. Other price calculation codes are used for simulation purposes.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

61 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Scenario: Cost price calculation
As part of our business case, you will calculate the standard cost for the main item (S100)
and linked components, based on the cost structure shown in the following diagram:

In this scenario you will perform the following activities:

62 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Exercise 2.6: Calculate cost and valuation prices
In this exercise, you will determine the cost price and print the cost price for the final product
and the linked components.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Calculate the standard costs for item [XX]-S100 (incl. subassemblies)
1. Click Common > Standard Costs > Calculation > Calculate Standard Cost. The Calculate
Standard Cost session opens.
2. Verify the Top-Down radio button is selected.
3. Verify 001 is populated in the Cost Calculation Code field.
4. Click the Zoom button in the second segment of the From Item field. The Item – Costing
session opens.
5. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
6. Press Enter to filter the results.
7. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
8. Click the OK button. The Calculate Standard Cost session displays.
9. Press Tab. [XX]-S100 is automatically populated in the To Item field.
10. Click the Calculate button. The Select Device session opens.
11. Click the Display tab.
12. Type D in the Device field.
13. Click the Continue button. The Calculate Standard Cost dialog box opens with the message:
“Process ready.”
14. Click the OK button.
15. Click the Close button to close the Calculate Standard Cost session.
16. Click Common > Standard Costs > Item Costs > Item Costs by Calculation Code.
17. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
18. Press Enter to apply the filter.
19. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
20. Click the References menu.
21. Click the Standard Costs Details menu item. The Item - Standard Costs Details session
opens.
22. Review the following values:

63 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 • Cost amounts for the materials of the components for item [XX]-S100
• Total cost price of item [XX]-S100
23. Click the Close (X) button to close the Item Standard Cost Details session. Note: You can
optionally repeat the review of the specific standard costs for items [XX]-S110 and [XX]-S130.
24. Click the Close (X) button to close the Item Cost by Calculation Code session.

Part 2: Update standard costs for item [XX]-S100 (incl. subassemblies)

1. Click Common > Standard Costs > Calculation > Calculate Standard Cost. The Calculate
Standard Cost session opens.
2. Verify the Top-Down radio button is selected.
3. Verify 001 is populated in the Cost Calculation Code field.
4. Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the From Item field.
5. Press Tab. [XX]-S100 is automatically populated in the second segment of the To Item field.
6. Click to select the Actualize Standard Cost and Revalue Inventory check box.
7. Click the Calculate button. The Select Device session opens.
8. Click the Display tab.
9. Type D in the Device field.
10. Click the Continue button. The Calculate Standard Cost dialog box opens with the message:
“Process ready.”
11. Click the OK button.
12. Click the Close button to close the Calculate Standard Cost session.

Part 3: Print the standard cost calculation of the main item

Click Common > Standard Costs > Item Costs > Print Cost Calculation. The Print Cost
Calculation session opens.
Verify 001 is populated in the Cost Calculation Code field.
Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item field.
Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Cost Calculation report displays.
Review the following data for item [XX]-S100 in the report:
• Total material costs of the components
• Total operation costs of the components
Note: Scroll down, if necessary, to view the operation costs.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Cost Calculation report. The Print Cost Calculation
session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Print Cost Calculation session.
Click Common > Standard Costs > Item Costs > Print Multilevel Cost Calculation.

64 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

 Verify 001 is populated in the Cost Calculation Code field.
Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item field.
Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Multilevel Cost Calculation report opens.
Review the following data for item [XX]-S100 in the report:
• Multilevel material costs of the components
• Multilevel operation costs of the components
Note: Scroll down, if necessary, to view the operation costs.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Multilevel Cost Calculation report.
Click the Close button to close the Print Multilevel Cost Calculation session.

65 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Check your understanding

Which two Infor sessions can be used to create a BOM?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

List the types of master data that must be created when defining the shop floor layout.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

The steps for how to calculate cost and valuation prices for a manufactured item and its
linked components appear below in the wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-3 to reflect
the correct sequence.

Update the standard costs for the main item and subassemblies

Print the standard cost calculation of the main item

Calculate the standard costs for the main item and subassemblies

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

66 Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Lesson 3: Production with manual
material issue
Estimated time
2 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the main elements and activities in the
production process in Infor LN. In this lesson, you will:
• Identify the main activities in production process with manual material issue and hours
accounting.
• Explain how to create a production order.
• Explain how to print production order documents.
• Explain how to release a production order.
• Explain how to initiate material to issue for a production order.
• Explain how to process outbound advices.
• Explain how to report operations completed.
• Explain how to post and process production order hours.
• Explain how to report orders completed.
• Explain how to process warehouse receipt for the finished product.
• Explain how to close a production order.

Topics
• Overview
• Production process with manual material issue and hours accounting

67 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how to execute the production flow in Infor LN. You will learn how to create
and process a production order, with all steps carried out manually.
The production process with manual material issue and hours accounting includes the following activities:
• Create production order
• Print production order documents
• Release production orders
• Process outbound advice
• Initiate material to issue for production order
• Report operations completed
• Post and process production order hours
• Report order completed
• Process warehouse receipts
• Close production order
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Production with manual material issue process flow in Infor LN

68 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

Production process with manual material issue and
hours accounting
Create production order
The Production Orders (tisfc0501m000) session is used to view and maintain a production order. You can
carry out several tasks in this session that relate to both the material side and the operations side of a
production order.
Material tasks include:
• Check inventory and inventory shortages
o On the Inventory tab, you can view the inventory for the production order and see whether
shortages are present.
o You can also use the Print Shortages by Production Order (tisfc0418m000) session to
determine whether there are material shortages for a specific production order on a specific
date. Click Print in the session header or on the Inventory tab to start the session.
• Add or delete a material or replace an estimated material with an alternative material
o You can do this on the Estimated Material tab, provided a production order does not yet have
the Active status.
Operations tasks include:
• Replan production order or operations, for example, change the production start time
o For a production order, you can change the start date in the header.
o For a specific operation, you can change the start date on the Production Planning tab.
• Change an operation, for example, by using an alternative work center
o You can change operations on the Production Planning tab, provided the operation does not
have the Completed status.
• Add an operation
o You can add an operation on the Production Planning tab, provided the production order
does not have the Active status.
• Perform capacity checks
o To perform a capacity check, you can select an operation on the Production Planning tab and
click a utilization session from the Specific menu.
• Release a planned production order
o You can release a production order with the order status Planned for production by clicking
Release Order from the Specific menu in the header.

Print and release production order documents

Print production order documents

The Print Production Order Documents (tisfc0408m000) session:
• Enables you to print the production order documents, such as routing sheets, material sheets,
and subcontracting notes.
• Can be started by clicking the Print button in either the Production Orders or the Production Order
(tisfc0101m100) session

69 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

When the order documents have been printed, the production order status switches to Documents
Printed.
The following is a high-level overview of how to print production order documents:

How to print production order documents in the Print Production Order

Documents session

Step 1 On the Selection Range tab, select the production orders for which
you want to print the production order documents.

Step 2 On the Options tab:

• Select whether you want to print the original documents, the
duplicates, or the modified documents.
• Determine the order in which you want to print the documents.

Step 3 On the Documents tab, select which order documents you want to
print.
Note: This selection will overrule the selection on the Documents
tab in the Shop Floor Control Parameters (tisfc0100s000) session.

The Production Orders session displays the following with respect to production order documents:
• Whether or not an order document has been printed
• Whether or not the information on the document has been modified after printing

Release production orders

If a production order is Planned, you can choose between the following two options for printing and
releasing the order documents:
• Print Production Order Documents
o The Print Production Order Documents session is started so that you can print the production
order documents.
o After that, you must manually release the planned production order.
• Print Documents and Release Order
o The Print Production Order Documents session is started to print the production order
documents.
o After that, the planned production order is released automatically.
In this course we will manually release the planned production order by selecting Actions > Release
Order in the Production Order session after printing the order documents. You can also use the Release
Production Orders (tisfc0204m000) session to release production orders to the shop floor.
After a production order is released, its status changes to Released, which indicates that production can
start (e.g., materials can be issued, and spent hours can be accounted).
When you release a production order, Infor LN performs the following actions:
• Warehousing orders are created in Warehousing. Through these warehousing orders, the issue
of materials and receipt into inventory of end products are handled.

70 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 • Allocations of materials are moved to the shop-floor warehouse.
• Inspection orders are created in Quality.
If the Moment Freezing Estimates field has the value During Releasing Order, the estimated order costs
are frozen, and the estimated end-item unit costs are calculated.

Initiate material to issue for production order

After a production order is entered, Infor LN generates the production planning and estimated materials
by means of the BOM and routing.
The Material to Issue for Production Orders (ticst0101m100) session:
• Displays the estimated materials for planned orders.
• Can be used to view and maintain material quantities which must be issued from the warehouse
to the production center.
You can only change the quantity if the production order has one of the following statuses:
• Released
• Active
• To be Completed
• Completed
You can click the Initiate Inventory Issue button in the Material to Issue for Production Orders session to
start the Initiate Inventory Issue (tisfc0207m000) session in order to issue material from inventory (i.e., to
activate a warehouse order line). Issuing from inventory is based on the quantity of material entered in the
To Issue field in the Material to Issue for Production Orders session.

Process outbound advice

The next step in the process is the generation and release of outbound advices. An outbound advice is a
list generated by Infor LN that advises you the location and lot from which goods must be picked and
possibly issued, taking into account factors such as blocked locations and the outbound method.
To generate and to release outbound advices, use the Process Outbound Advice menu option in the
Warehousing Order (whinh2100m100) session related to the production order.

Report operations completed

You can use the Report Operations Completed (tisfc0130m000) session to report progress of the
production process by reporting quantities as completed or rejected for successive operations. If you
report progress on the last operation of the production order, it is possible to book the completed product
into inventory.
You can report a specific operation completed or rejected in one go, but you can also complete an
operation in parts. The main procedures for each option are described below:
• To report an operation completed in one go
o The Report Operations Completed (tisfc0130m000) overview session lists all operations of a
production order.
o You can enter the numbers of products that are completed or rejected for a specific operation
directly in either the Completed or the Rejected field. After you enter a number, the number is
also displayed in either the Cumulative Completed or the Cumulative Rejected field.

71 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 o If you use backflushing, Infor LN asks whether to backflush by displaying a dialog box with
the message: “Backflush materials/hours immediately?”
o If you enter a number of products for the last operation and you save the operation, Infor LN
asks a number of questions, such as:
▪ “Immediately post main item to inventory?”
▪ “Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
o When you enter information for every operation, Infor LN keeps track of the work that is done
on the operations, and the material that is used.
o If you want to change the operation status to Completed, you must enter the number of
products that you want to report as completed or rejected, then click Complete Operation.
• To report an operation completed in parts
o To report an operation as completed in parts, you enter an initial quantity in either the
Completed or the Rejected field.
o If you save the operation, the quantity is displayed in either the Cumulative Completed or the
Cumulative Rejected field.
o When desired, you can enter an additional quantity in either the Completed field or the
Rejected field.
o If you save the operation again, the additional quantity is added up in the Cumulative
Completed or the Cumulative Rejected field.
o If you are working on the last operation of the production order, and you enter only a part of
the products in the Completed or the Rejected field, you can save the operation, after which
that part of the products can be transferred to inventory.

Production order hours

You can use the Production Order Hours (bptmm1120m000) session to register hours spent on a
production order by employee and operation.

Report order completed

When production is ready, you must report the production order completed. After you have reported a
production order completed, you can still process material issues for the production order, or post hours
to it. You can also report the quantities of end products to deliver to inventory and the quantity of rejected
items.
You can use the Report Orders Completed (tisfc0120s000) overview session to display orders that must
be reported as complete, or that were already reported as complete. However, you must use the Report
Orders Completed (tisfc0120s000) detail session in order to report a production order, or a partial order
quantity, as complete.
You can start the Report Orders Completed (tisfc0120s000) detail session in one of two ways:
• By selecting an order in the Report Orders Completed overview session and clicking the Go to
Details button
• By selecting the Report Orders Completed option from the appropriate menu in the Production
Orders session
To report an order as completed in the Report Orders Completed detail session, select To be Completed
or Completed in the Order Status field.
If you complete a production order, the production order status changes to To be Completed. After the
warehouse inbound procedure is finished, the order status changes to Completed, triggered by
Warehousing. If the Quantity to Deliver is 0 (zero), the order status is immediately set to Completed.

72 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

Warehouse receipts
A warehouse receipt is the physical acceptance of goods in the warehouse. A receipt registers
information such as the quantity of the goods, receipt date, packing slip data and inspection data.
Warehouse inspections are carried out for both incoming goods and outgoing goods.
You can use the Warehouse Receipts (whinh2610m100) session to view, maintain, and process the
receipt of inbound order lines in a warehouse.

Close production orders

You can use the Close Production Orders (ticst0201m000) session to close production orders. If you
close a production order, Infor LN:
• Calculates the actual end item unit cost.
• Calculates the financial results of the production order and posts them to Financials.
• Updates the history of the actual material and operation costs, the operation times, and the hours
accounting.
• Corrects surcharges based on actual costs.
• Transfers the financial results to Warehousing, if actual costing is used.
Only Completed production orders can be closed. When a production order is closed, the production
order status changes from Completed to Closed.
If you want to post additional materials and hours, you must change the status of production orders from
Closed to Completed. (You can reset the status in the Reset Production Order Status (ticst0203m000)
session.)

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

73 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Scenario: Production process with manual material issue
As part of our business case, Cell Electronics has all of the material required for production
of the S100 Circa Smartphone and subassembly in the warehouse because it was already
purchased.
However, the purchase order is not in the system, so you will need to create an inventory
adjustment order to let the system use these items from the warehouse for production.
Then you will execute the production process with manual material issue and hours
accounting to produce the S110 Smartphone Cover Blue as the first stage of production for
the end item.
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

74 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Exercise 3.1: Create production order
In this exercise, you will create an adjustment order and a production order for the item.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create an inventory adjustment order

1. Click Warehousing > Cycle Counting/Adjustment Orders > Adjustment Orders.
2. Click the New button. The Adjustment Order session opens.
3. Click the Zoom button in the Warehouse field. The Warehouses session opens.
4. Click to select the check box for MAIN in the Warehouse column.
5. Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
6. Click the Zoom button in the Reason for Adjustment field. The Reasons session opens.
7. Click to select the check box for ADJ001 in the Reason column.
8. Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
9. Click the New Line button on the Lines tab menu bar. A new line displays with 10 populated in
the Line column.
10. Type [XX]-S111 in the second segment of the Item field.
11. Type 1002 in the Location field.
12. Type 1000 in the Inventory Adjusted field.
13. Press Tab. 1000 is automatically populated in the Variance field.
14. Press Tab twice. A new line displays with 20 populated in the Line column.
15. Type [XX]-S112 in the second segment of the Item field.
16. Repeat steps 11-13 for line 20.
17. Press Tab twice. A new line displays with 30 populated in the Line field.
18. Type [XX]-S121 in the second segment of the Item field.
19. Repeat steps 11-13 for line 30.
20. Press Tab twice. A new line displays with 40 in the Line field.
21. Type [XX]-S131 in the second segment of the Item field.
22. Repeat steps 11-13 for line 40.
23. Press Tab twice. A new line displays with 50 populated in the Line field.
24. Type [XX]-S132 in the second segment of the Item field.

75 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 25. Repeat steps 11-13 for line 50.
26. Click the Save button.
27. Click the Process button on the header menu bar. The Adjustment Order dialog box opens with
the message: “End of process.”
28. Click the OK button. Processed displays in the Status field (next to the Order field in the
header), and the [adjustment order number] is populated in the Order field.
29. Write down your adjustment order number: ______________________________.
30. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Order session. The
Adjustment Orders session displays. A green check mark now displays in the Manual
Adjustment column for [your adjustment order number].
31. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Orders session.

Part 2: Create a production order

Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders. The Production Orders session
opens.
Click the New button. The Production Order session opens with SFC automatically populated
in the Production Order field.
Note: You may have to pull down the Operations / Materials panel to see all the fields of the top
portion of the session.
Type [XX]-S110 in the second segment of the Item field.
Press Tab. Several fields are automatically populated with data based on the selected item.
Type 100 in the Quantity Ordered field.
Press Tab eight times. Several fields are automatically populated.
Click the Save button. A new line is created in the Operations tab list view with 10 populated in
the Operation field.
Review the values in the following fields in the header:
Production Start
Requested Delivery
Planned Delivery
Review the fields and data for the operation 10 line in the Operations tab list view.
Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Production Planning session opens with
the Planning Related tab displayed by default.
Review the fields and data on the Planning Related tab.
Click the Quantity tab.
Review the fields and data on the Quantity tab.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Planning session. The
Production Order session displays.
Click the Materials tab.

76 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Review the fields and data in the Materials tab. Two lines are displayed in the list view, one for
item [XX]-S111, and one for item [XX]-S112.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S111. The Estimated Materials session opens.
Click the Inventory Data tab.
Review the values in the Inventory Data section.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays with the [production order number] populated in the
Production Order field.
Write down your production order number: ______________________________.
Note: Do not close the Production Order session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 3.2: Print order documents and release order

In this exercise, you will print the production order documents and release the production
order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Order session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Print production order documents

1. Click the Print button on the header menu bar. The Print Production Order Documents session
opens.
2. Click the Documents tab.
3. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Order Covering Note
• Subcontracting Note
• Order Distribution

77 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 • Serial Number List
Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Order Covering Note report opens.
Review the Routing Sheet and Material List data in the report. Note: Scroll down, if necessary,
to view the data.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Order Covering Note report. The Print Production
Order Documents session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Print Production Order Documents session. The
Production Order session displays. The order status (to the right of the Production Order field
in the header) is now Printed.

Part 2: Release production orders

Click Actions in the header menu bar.
Click the Release Order menu item. The order status (to the right of the Production Order field
in the header) is now Released.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

78 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Exercise 3.3: Initiate material to issue for production order
In this exercise, you will issue the material to production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Verify that the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column
is selected.
Click Actions > Materials > Material to Issue for Production Orders. The Material to Issue
for Production Orders session opens.
Click to select the check boxes for [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112 in the Item column.
Verify 1 is populated in the To Issue field for both items [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112.
Click the Initiate Inventory Issue button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Picking List by Location report opens.
Review the Picking List by Location report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Picking List by Location report. The Material to Issue
for Production Orders session displays. 1 is now populated in the To Issue by Warehouse
field, and 0 is now populated in the To Issue field.
Note: Do not close the Material to Issue for Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

79 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Exercise 3.4: Process outbound advice
In this exercise, you will process the outbound advice to issue the material for the production
order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Material to Issue for Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify the check boxes for items [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112 in the Item column are selected.
2. Click the References menu.
3. Click the Warehouse Orders menu item. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
4. Click the Go to Details button for [your production order number] in the Order column and
ISS [issue simple (aut)] in the Order Type column. The Warehousing Order session opens.
5. Click to select the check box for 10 in the Order Line column in the list view.
6. Click References on the Outbound Lines tab menu bar.
7. Click the Status Overview menu option. The Outbound Line Status Overview session opens.
8. Review the data in the Activities and Quantities in Inventory Unit sections.
9. Click the Actions menu.
10. Click the Picking List menu option. The Picking List session opens.
11. Click to select the check boxes for items [XX]-S111 and [XX]-S112 in the Item column.
12. Click the Pick Mission button. Green check marks are now populated in the Picked column for
both items.
Notes:
• You may need to scroll to the right to see the Picked column.
• A green check mark in the Picked column for an item means that the item has been
processed.
13. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Picking List session. The Outbound Line
Status Overview session displays.
14. Review the updated Picked value for item [XX]-S111 in the Quantities In Inventory Unit
section.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Outbound Line Status Overview session.
The Warehousing Order session displays.
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Orders session. The
Material to Issue for Production Orders session displays. For both items in the list view, 1 now

80 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 displays in the Actual Quantity field, and 0 is now populated in the To Issue by Warehouse
field. Note: Scroll to the right, if necessary, to view the updated quantity.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Material to Issue for Production Orders
session. The Production Orders session displays.
19. Verify the check box for [your production order number] is still selected.
20. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Material Costs session opens.
21. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S111. The Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs
detail session opens.
22. Click the Company Owned tab.
23. Review the estimated and actual data for [your production order number] for item [XX]-S111.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs detail
session. The Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs session displays.
25. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays.
26. Click the Refresh button. Active now displays in the Order Status column for [your production
order number].
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Exercise 3.5: Report operations completed

In this exercise, you will report the operations of the production order as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Operations Completed menu option. The Report Operations Completed
session opens.
Click the Go to Details button for the operation 10 line. The Report Operations Completed
detail session opens.
Type 100 in the first segment of the Completed field [Additional (Main)] in the Reported Item
Quantities section.

81 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Press Tab twice. 100 is automatically populated in the second segment of the Completed field
[Cumulative (Main)] in the Reported Item Quantities section.
Click the Complete button. The Report Operations Completed dialog box opens with the
message: “Immediately post main item to inventory?”
Click the No button. Completed now displays next to the Operation field (in the header).
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed detail
session. The Report Operations Completed session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed session.
The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 3.6: Post and process production order hours

In this exercise, you will register and process one hour by employee and machine for your
production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Post and process hours

Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
Click the References menu.
Click the Hours Accounting menu option. The Production Order Hours session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays in the list view.
Click the Zoom button in the Employee field. The Employees – General session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-20 in the Employee column.

82 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Click the OK button. The Production Order Hours session displays.
Type 1 in the Labor Time field. Note: Scroll to the right, if necessary, to view the field.
Type 1 in the Machine Time field. A Production Order Hours window displays, with the
message: Update man and/or machine hours based on man and machine occupation?
Click the Yes button. The Production Order Hours session displays. Ensure 1 is now entered
in the Machine Time field.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-20 in the Employee column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Process Hours and Expenses menu option. The Process Hours and Expenses
session opens.
Click to select the Process Report check box in the Options section.
Click the Process button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Processed Hours and Expenses report opens.
Review the contents of the Processed Hours and Expenses report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Processed Hours and Expenses report. The
Processed Hours and Expenses session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Process Hours and Expenses session. The Production
Order Hours session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Hours session. The
Production Orders session displays.

Part 2: View the estimated and actual hours

1. Verify the check box for [your production order number] is still selected.
2. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Hours Costs session opens.
3. Click Go to Details button for the operation 10 line. The Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs
detail session opens.
4. Review the estimated and actual hours updated for your production order.
5. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs detail
session. The Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs session displays.
6. Click the Costs tab.
7. Review the fields and values for the operation 10 line.
8. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

83 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 3.7: Report order completed

In this exercise, you will report the production order as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify [your production order number] in the Production Order column is selected.
2. Click the Actions menu.
3. Click the Report Orders Completed menu item. The Report Orders Completed session opens.
4. Type 100 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field.
5. Press Tab. 100 is automatically populated in the Quantity to Deliver field.
6. Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
7. Click the Production Completed list item. Both segments of the Completion Date fields are
automatically populated.
8. Click the Save button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
9. Click the No button. Both segments of the Delivery Date field are automatically populated.
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays.
11. Click the Views menu.
12. Click the Show All Orders menu option. The filtered results display.
13. Review the value in the Order Status field for [your production order number]. The value is
Production Completed.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

84 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 3.8: Process warehouse receipt

In this exercise, you will execute the receipt process for the production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Warehousing > Receipts/Inspections > Receipts. The Warehouse Receipts session
opens.
2. Type [your production order number] in the Order column filter field in the Inbound Lines tab list
view.
3. Press Enter to apply the filter.
4. Click to select the check box for [your production order number] in the Order column.
5. Click the Receive button on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar.
6. Click the Confirm button on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar. The receipt is confirmed and the
line related to [your production order number] no longer displays in the list view of the
Inbound Lines tab.
7. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouse Receipts session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

85 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

 Exercise 3.9: Close production order
In this exercise, you will close the production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders. The Production Orders session
opens.
2. Type [your production order number] in the Production Order column filter field.
3. Press Enter to filter the results.
4. Click to select the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order
column.
5. Click the Actions menu.
6. Click the Close Orders menu item. The Close Production Orders session opens.
7. Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
8. Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
9. Click the Display tab.
10. Type D in the Device field.
11. Click the Continue button. The Close Production Orders (Process Report) report displays.
12. Review the contents of the report.
13. Click the Close (X) button to close the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report. The
Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report opens.
14. Review the contents of the report.
15. Click the Close (X) button to close the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions)
report. The Production Orders session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status
column for [your production order number].
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

86 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

Check your understanding
The steps for how to process a production order with manual material issue appear below in
the wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-9 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create production order

Initiate material from production order

Print production order documents and release order

Generate and release outbound advice

Report operation complete

Close production order

Report order completed

Register hours

Process warehouse receipt

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

87 Lesson 3: Production with manual material issue

Lesson 4: Production with direct
material issue
Estimated time
1 hour

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to describe the main activities in the production process with
direct material issue. In this lesson, you will:
• Explain how to activate direct processing for materials.
• Explain how to create and process a production order with direct material issue.
• Explain how to control production using the JSC Operator Workbench.

Topics
• Overview
• Manufacturing master data
• Production order process with direct material issue

88 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Overview
In this lesson, you will learn how to process a production order with direct material issue. If you use direct
material issue, the total quantity of the estimated material will be directly issued once the production order
has been released. This means that the outbound procedure is carried out automatically and that
outbound advices are automatically generated and released.
The production process with direct material issue includes the following activities:
• Create production order
• Print production order documents and release production orders
• Control production using JSC Operator Workbench
o Report operations completed
o Post and process production order hours
• Report order completed
• Close production order
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Production with direct material issue process flow in Infor LN

89 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Manufacturing master data
Item - production
In order to activate direct processing for materials, select both of the following check boxes available on
the Job Shop Process tab of the Item – Production session:
• Direct Initiate Inventory Issue
o If this check box is selected, the warehouse order line for the material will be unblocked
automatically during production order release.
o Consequently, you do not need to run the Initiate Inventory Issue session to unblock the
material.
• Direct Process Warehouse Order Line
o If this check box is selected for the material, the warehouse outbound procedure will be
carried out automatically when the warehouse order line is unblocked.
An unblocked warehouse order line serves as a signal for the warehouse employees to begin the
warehouse outbound procedure, starting with an outbound advice for the material. The warehouse
outbound procedure results in material sent to the shop floor.
In our scenario, we will select these check boxes for items S131 and S132.

Exercise 4.1: Activate direct processing for materials

In this exercise, you will verify the direct delivery option for the items.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Item - Production.
Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
Press Enter to apply the filter.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S131. The Item - Production detail session opens.
Click the Job Shop Process tab.
Click to select the Direct Initiate Inventory Issue check box.
Verify the Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check box is selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production detail session. The Item
- Production session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S132. The Item - Production detail session opens.

90 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 Repeat steps 5-7 for item [XX]-S132.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production detail session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

91 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Production process with direct material issue
Create production order
To create a production order with direct material issue, direct processing for materials must be activated,
which means that the Direct Initiate Inventory Issue and Direct Process Warehouse Order Line check
boxes must be enabled for each item.
To check this, after creating the production order, you can use the Go to Details button for items listed on
the Materials tab of the Production Order session to open the Estimated Materials (ticst0101m000)
session. In the Estimated Materials session, click the Inventory Data tab to view whether or not these
check boxes are enabled.

Control production using JSC Operator Workbench

Overview
The JSC Operator Workbench (tisfc8350m000) makes it possible for a work center/machine operator to:
• Record production order operation set up and run times
• Register completed and rejected quantities
• Report operations complete.
• View production order operation data, including operation steps, instructions, materials, tools,
texts, and related documents
• Filter and sort operation data
Note: This workbench is not suited for production orders with an order distribution. Use the Report Orders
Completed (tisfc0120s000) or Report Orders Completed Globally (tisfc0206m000) sessions for production
orders with an order distribution.

Layout

JSC Operator Workbench session

92 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

The buttons and fields on the workbench toolbar are described in the following table:

Button / field Description

Refresh Use this button to update the production order operation data from Infor
LN.

Work Center This drop-down list displays a list of all main work centers and sub work
centers defined in the Work Center session for the current company.
After selecting a work center from this list, the production order operation
data for the selected work center(s) is displayed in the list view.
By default, Infor LN selects the work center related to the user who logs
in; this department must be a work center or sub work center defined in
the Employees - General session.

Planned Production This displays the selected planned production start date.
Start

Operator This drop-down list displays the list of operators, which is selected from
the Employees – General and the Employees - People sessions.
The Department of the employee must be of type Work Center in the
Departments (tcmcs0565m000) session.
The changes recorded for the production order processes in the
specified time period are logged against the selected operator.
The registration of quantities is independent of the selected operator;
Infor LN does not register the operator who specifies the quantities or
completes the operation.

User Settings Use this option to set the default/personalized layout.

The different sections in the workbench layout are described in the following table:

Section Description

Actions This section contains buttons that trigger an action, such as setup, run,
stop, etc.

Operations This section displays the operations based on the data entered using the
fields on the Toolbar and in the filter fields of this section.
The data in this section is populated from the Production Orders session
for the work centers selected.

Operation Steps and This section displays the operation steps and instructions for the
Instructions selected operation.

93 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 Section Description

Material This section displays the material that is required for the selected
operation.

Tools and Text This section displays the tools required for the selected operation.
The text section displays the text related to the production order,
operation, task or operation step.

Message This section displays errors / warnings message and information related
to JSC operator.

Register hours
The hours registration process is comprised of the following steps: setup time recording, run time
recording, and stop time recording.
Setup time recording
The workbench can record time taken by the operator to complete the task. The operator uses the Setup
button to record the time.
• To start the time recording, click the Setup button.
• The time recording stops when the Stop or Run button is clicked.
• To resume the time recording, select the operation for which the recording is to be started and
click the Setup button.
It is possible to record the time for multiple operators for one operation, by changing the operator in the
Operation Selection pane before you click the Setup for an operation for which the time recording has
been stopped.
The setup time is registered in the Production Order Hours session.
Run time recording
The workbench can record production order operation run time using the Run button. The Run button
applies to the selected operation and the selected operator.
• To start a run time recording, click the Run button in the Action pane.
• To stop recording, click the Stop button.
• To resume recording, click the Run button after selecting the operation for which the recording is
to be resumed.
It is possible to record the time for multiple operators for one operation, by changing the operator in the
Operation Selection pane before you click the Run for an operation for which the time recording has been
stopped.
The run time is registered in the Production Order Hours session.
Stop time recording
The setup time and run time recording is stopped when the user clicks the Stop button. The recording is
stopped only for the selected operator; time recording for other operators is continuous unless specifically
selected and stopped separately. For an operation, the time recording stops when the operation is
completed.

94 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Register quantities and complete operation
You can register quantities or complete operation using the buttons in the Actions menu. You must select
a production order operation line to enable the Register Quantities and Complete Operation buttons. After
clicking the Register Quantities or Complete Operation buttons, their corresponding windows will open for
you to modify the registered or the completed quantity.
Registering quantities
The Register Quantities button allows the operator to register completed quantities and rejected
quantities for the selected operation.
Quantities can be registered as:
• Additionally Completed
• Additionally Rejected
• Cumulatively Completed
• Cumulatively Rejected
The values in these fields are defaulted from Infor LN when you click the Default button. The process is
the same as in the Report Operations Completed session.
It is possible to specify a reason in the Reject Reason field. The reason can be selected from the
Reasons (tcmcs0105m000) session.
Completing an operation
To complete an operation, select the operation and click the Complete operation button. The process of
recording the quantity is similar to the Registering process. The status of the operation will then be set to
Completed. Completing the operation stops the time recording for all operators. When operations are
reported complete, hours and materials are backflushed, when applicable. This is similar to the logic of
the Report Operations Completed session.

Post main item to inventory

The Post to Inventory when Reporting on Last Operation field in the Production Order Parameters
(tisfc0100s000) session determines if a main/end item is posted to inventory.

Complete Operation pane

95 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

When reporting a quantity complete for the last operation and when posting the main/end item to
inventory is allowed, the following fields are displayed in the Quantity Registration pane or the Complete
Operation pane:
• Post main item to inventory: Select Yes or No.
o If you select No, it is possible to save the quantity completed and the main item(s) are not
posted to inventory when a quantity is reported completed, and the Automatically confirm
receipt field is not displayed.
o If you select Yes, the Automatically confirm receipt field is displayed.
▪ Automatically confirm receipt : Select Yes or No to save the completed quantity.
• The value in this field is defaulted based on the Warehouse Receipt activity of the
related production warehouse order inbound line. If the receipt activity process is
automated, the field is defaulted to Yes; else, No, but you can change these values.
o If you select Yes, the main item(s) are posted to inventory and are also
received in the warehouse.
o If you selects No, the main items are posted to inventory and are not
received in the warehouse.

Scenario: Production process with direct material issue

As part of our business case, you will execute the production process with direct material
issue to produce the S130 SIM Card. As part of this process, you will use the JSC Operator
Workbench to control the following production activities:
• Report operations completed
• Post and process production order hours
In addition, you will control production time by using the stopwatch functionality in the JSC
Operator Workbench to calculate actual time for production.
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

96 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 Exercise 4.2: Create production order
In this exercise, you will create a production order for the items with direct material issue.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders. The Production Orders session
opens.
2. Click the New button. The Production Order session opens with SFC populated in the
Production Order field.
3. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item field.
4. Type 100 in the Quantity Ordered field.
5. Press Tab eight times to navigate to the Requested Delivery field.
6. Type 12:00 PM in the second segment of the Requested Delivery field.
7. Click the Save button. The Operations tab list view is automatically populated, and [your
production order number] is automatically generated and displays in the Production Order
field.
8. Write down your production order number: _____________________.
9. Click the Materials tab. Review the fields and data for the items in the list view.
Note: Scroll to the right if necessary, to view all fields.
10. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S131. The Estimated Materials session opens.
11. Click the Inventory Data tab.
12. Verify the following check boxes are selected:
• Direct Initiate Inventory Issue
• Direct Process Warehouse Order Line
13. Review the values in the Inventory Data section.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays.
15. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S132. The Estimated Materials session opens.
16. Repeat steps 11-13 for item [XX]-S132.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Order session.

97 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 Exercise 4.3: Print order documents and release order
In this exercise, you will print the direct material issue production order documents and
release the order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Order session for [your production order number] is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify no check boxes are selected in the list view.
2. Click the Actions menu from the header bar.
3. Click the Print Documents and Release Order menu item. The Print Production Order
Documents session opens.
4. Click the Documents tab.
5. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Order Covering Note
• Subcontracting Note
• Order Distribution
• Serial Number List
6. Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
7. Click the Display tab.
8. Type D in the Device field.
9. Click the Continue button. The Order Covering Note report opens. You may need to click the
report tab to view the report.
10. Review the details of the Routing Sheet and Material List for your production order in the report.
11. Click the Close (X) button to close the Order Covering Note report. The Production Order
session displays. The order status (to the right of the Production Order field in the header) is
now Active.
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
13. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
14. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Material Costs session opens.
15. Review the values in the Actual Quantity field for both items in the list view. The values have
been updated with the estimated quantities of items [XX]-S131 and [XX]-S132.

98 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays. Active displays in the Order Status column
for [your production order number].
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Exercise 4.4: Control production using JSC Operator Workbench

In this exercise, you will use the JSC Operator Workbench to control production.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Review production order details

1. Type [your production order number] in the Production Order column filter field.
2. Press Enter to filter the results.
3. Click the Go to Details button for production order [your production order number]. The
Production Order session displays.
4. Verify the Operations tab is active.
5. Review the values in the Work Center column for the items in the list view. [XX]-30 displays in
the Work Center column for operations 10 and 20, and [XX]-40 displays for operation 30.
6. Review the value in the Remainder Start Date field for operation 10.
7. Write down the remainder start date for operation 10: ______________.

Part 2: Capture production order in JSC Operator Workbench

Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Control > Operator Workbench. The JSC
Operator Workbench session opens.
Click the Work Centers drop-down arrow.
Click to select the [XX]-30 check box.
Note: You may need to scroll down in the drop-down list to see this work center.
Verify all other check boxes in the Work Centers drop-down list are cleared.
Click the Operator drop-down arrow.
Click to select the [XX]-30 list item.
Note: You may need to scroll down in the drop-down list to see this operator.
Click to select [the remainder start date for operation 10] in the Planned Production Start
field. The Operations list view is automatically populated.

99 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 Type [your production order number] in the Production Order column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click anywhere on the line related to [your production order]. The line is highlighted in blue.
Review the columns and data in the line related to [your production order]. Note: You may
need to scroll to see these columns.
10 displays in the Operation column.
20 displays in the Next Operation column.
Review the value in the Remaining Production Time column.
Write down the remaining production time value: ______________.
Click the Setup button.
Wait at least two minutes before proceeding.
Note: This is necessary because you will use the JSC Operator Workbench as a stopwatch to
calculate the time for production and setup. This step represents the setup time.

Part 3: Report production hours and quantity for operation 10

1. Click the Production Orders session tab. The Production Orders session displays.
2. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
3. Click the References menu.
4. Click the Hours Accounting menu option. The Production Order Hours session opens.
5. Review the contents of the list view.
• A line displays in the list view with the following values automatically populated in the
following fields:
o [XX]-30 is populated in the Employee field.
o [XX]-40 is populated in the Task field.
o [XX]-30 is populated in the Work Center and Machine fields.
6. Click the JSC Operator Workbench session tab. The JSC Operator Workbench session
displays.
7. Click the Stop Setup button.
Note: Do not click the Stop Setup button until two minutes have passed since performing step 22
of Part 1.
8. Click the Production Order Hours session tab. The Production Order Hours session displays.
9. Click to select the check box for [XX]-30 in the Employee column.
10. Click the Actions menu.
11. Click the Process Hours and Expenses menu option. The Process Hours and Expenses
session opens.
12. Verify [XX]-30 displays in both segments of the Employee field.
13. Click the Process button. The Select Device session opens.
14. Click the Display tab.

100 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 15. Type D in the Device field.
16. Click the Continue button. The Process Hours and Expenses session displays. A message
displays at the bottom of the window, indicating no errors were found for an error report, and no
report is printed.
17. Click the Close button to close the Process Hours and Expenses session. The Production
Order Hours session displays. A green check mark now displays in the Processed field for
employee [XX]-30.
Note: Scroll to the right, if necessary, to view this field.
18. Click the JSC Operator Workbench session tab. The JSC Operator Workbench session
displays.
19. Review the value in the Remaining Production Time field in the line related to [your
production order] and operation 10.
20. Click the Refresh button. The value in the Remaining Production Time field is updated.
21. Click to highlight the line in the Operations list view related to production order [your production
order] and operation 10.
22. Click the Run button.
23. Wait two minutes.
Note: This step represents the production run time.
24. Click the Stop Run button.
25. Review the value in the Remaining Production Time field in the line related to production order
[your production order number] and operation 10.
26. Click the Production Order Hours session tab. The Production Order Hours session displays.
27. Click the Refresh button. A second line displays in the list view.
28. Click to clear the check box for the first line.
29. Click to select the check box for the second line.
30. Click the Actions menu.
31. Click the Process Hours and Expenses menu option. The Process Hours and Expenses
session opens.
32. Click the Process button. The Select Device session opens.
33. Click the Display tab.
34. Type D in the Device field.
35. Click the Continue button. The Process Hours and Expenses session displays. A message
displays at the bottom of the window, indicating no errors were found for an error report, and no
report is printed.
36. Click the Close button to close the Process Hours and Expenses session. The Production
Order Hours session displays. A green check mark now displays in the Processed field for the
second line for employee [XX]-30.
37. Click the JSC Operator Workbench session tab. The JSC Operator Workbench session
displays.

101 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 38. Review the value in the Remaining Production Time field in the line related to production order
[your production order] and operation 10.
39. Click the Refresh button. The value in the Remaining Production Time field in the line related
to production order [your production order] and operation 10 is updated.
40. Click to highlight the line in the Operations list view related to production order [your production
order] and operation 10.
41. Click the Complete Operation button. The Complete Operation session opens.
42. Type 100 in the first segment of the Completed field.
43. Press Tab. 100 is automatically populated in the second segment of the Completed field.
44. Click the Default button (to the right of the second segment of the Completed field).
45. Click the Complete Operation button. The JSC Operator Workbench session displays. A green
check mark now displays in the Status column of the line related to production order [your
production order] and operation 10.

Part 4: Report quantity for operation 20

1. Click the Refresh button. The line related to production order [your production order] and
operation 10 is no longer displayed in the list view.
2. Click the Production Order session tab. The Production Order session displays.
3. Click the Refresh button.
4. Review the value in the Remainder Start Date column for the operation 20 line.
5. Write down the remainder start date for operation 20: ______________ .
6. Click the JSC Operator Workbench session tab. The JSC Operator Workbench session
displays.
7. Click the Planned Production Start Date calendar button. The current month is displayed.
8. Click to select [the remainder start date for operation 20] in the Planned Production Start
field. The Operations list view is automatically populated.
9. Type [your production order number] in the Production Order filter field.
10. Press Enter to filter the results.
11. Review the columns and data in the line related to [your production order].
• 20 displays in the Operation column.
• 30 displays in the Next Operation column.
• Notice the value in the Remaining Production Time column.
12. Click to highlight the line related to production order [your production order] and operation 20.
13. Click the Complete Operation button. The Complete Operation session opens.
14. Click the Default button to the right of the Completed (Cumulative) field. 100 is automatically
populated in both segments of the Completed field.
15. Click the Complete Operation button. The JSC Operator Workbench session displays. A green
check mark now displays in the Status column of the line related to production order [your
production order] and operation 20.

102 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 16. Click the Refresh button. The line related to production order [your production order] and
operation 20 no longer displays in the list view.

Part 5: Report quantity for operation 30

1. Click the Production Order session tab. The Production Order session displays.
2. Click the Refresh button.
3. Review the date in the Remainder Start Date field for the operation 30 line.
4. Write down the remainder start date for operation 30: ________________________.
5. Click the JSC Operator Workbench session tab. The JSC Operator Workbench session
displays.
6. Click the Work Centers drop-down arrow.
7. Click to clear the [XX]-30 Software Installation check box.
8. Click to select the [XX]-40 Quality Management check box.
9. Click the Planned Production Date calendar button. The current month is displayed.
10. Click to select [the operation 30 remainder start date] in the Planned Production Start Date
field. The list view is automatically populated.
11. Type [your production order number] in the Production Order column filter field.
12. Press Enter to filter the results.
13. Review the columns and data in the line related to [your production order].
• 30 displays in the Operation column.
• 0 displays in the Next Operation column.
14. Click to highlight the line related to production order [your production order] and operation 30.
15. Click the Complete Operation button. The Complete Operation window opens.
16. Click the Default button to the right of the Completed (Cumulative) field. 100 is automatically
populated in both segments of the Completed field.
17. Review the fields and radio buttons available in the Processing section of the Complete
Operation window.
18. Verify the No radio button is selected for the Automatically confirm receipt parameter.
19. Click to select the No radio button for the Post main item to inventory parameter. The
Automatically confirm receipt parameter (and its corresponding radio buttons) is now hidden.
20. Click the Complete Operation button. The JSC Operator Workbench session displays.
21. Click the Refresh button. The line related to production order [your production order] and
operation 30 no longer displays in the list view.
22. Click the Close (X) button to close the JSC Operator Workbench session. The Production
Order session displays.
23. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Order Hours session displays.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Hours session. The
Production Orders session displays

103 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 25. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
26. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Hours Costs session opens with the Hours tab displayed by default.
27. Review the fields and data in the list view of the Hours tab.
28. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 4.5: Report order completed

In this exercise, you will report the direct material issue production order as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
selected.
2. Click the Actions menu.
3. Click the Report Orders Completed menu option. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
4. Type 100 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field.
5. Press Tab. 100 is automatically populated in the Quantity to Deliver field.
6. Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
7. Click the Production Completed list item. The Completion Date fields are automatically
populated.

104 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 8. Click the Save button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
9. Click the Yes button. The Delivery Date fields are automatically populated.
10. Review the following values in the following fields:
• 0 now displays in the Additional Quantity to Deliver and Quantity to Deliver fields.
• Completed now displays in the Order Status field.
• 100 displays in the Delivered field (in the Quantities Done section).
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays.
12. Verify Views > Show All Orders is selected. Completed now displays in the Order Status
column for [your production order number].
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Exercise 4.6: Close production order

In this exercise, you will close the production order created for the items with direct material
issue.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
selected.
2. Click the Actions menu.
3. Click the Close Orders menu item. The Close Production Orders session opens.
4. Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
5. Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
6. Click the Display tab.
7. Type D in the Device field.
8. Click the Continue button. Two reports display: The Production Order Results (Financial
Transactions) report and the Close Production Orders (Process Report).
9. Review the contents of the Close Production Orders (Process Report). It contains a message
that the order has been processed successfully.

105 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

 10. Click the Close (X) button to close the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report. The
Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report displays.
11. Review the contents of the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report.
12. Click the Close (X) button to close the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions)
report. The Production Orders session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status
column for [your production order number].
13. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

106 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Check your understanding

Which two check boxes must be enabled for an item in the Item – Production session in order
to activate direct processing of materials for production?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

After recording the time taken by an operator to complete a task using the Setup button in
JSC Operator Workbench, in which session is the recorded time registered?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

107 Lesson 4: Production with direct material issue

Lesson 5: Production with backflushing
Estimated time
1 hour

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to use backflushing in production. In this
lesson, you will:
• Explain the concept of backflushing.
• Explain how to maintain backflushing of materials and hours.
• Explain how to process production orders with backflushing.

Topics
• Overview
• Manufacturing master data
• Production process with backflushing

108 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

Overview
Backflushing is the automatic issue of materials from inventory, or accounting for the hours spent
manufacturing an item, based on theoretical usage and the quantity of the item reported as complete.

If you do not want to record every issue of a material or every spent production hour individually, you can
apply backflushing instead. This saves time, but some precision is lost. Typically, backflushing is used for
low cost material with a regular consumption. Backflushing does not reflect the physical material flow; it is
an administrative process. Material is shipped to the shop floor, where it is consumed by an JSC order.
However, the material is accounted for on the order administratively at a later time.
If a shortage exists for material that you are backflushing, you can use the Process Material Shortages
(tisfc0221m000) session to process the remaining material quantity if the material is in stock again.
The production process with backflushing includes the following activities:
• Create production order
• Print production order documents and release production orders
• Report order completed
• Backflush materials and hours
• Close production order
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Production with backflushing process flow in Infor LN

109 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

Manufacturing master data
Item – production
In order to enable backflushing for materials and hours, specific parameters must be set for the items in
Item – Production. These parameters are described in the following table:

Check box Description

As material allow If this check box is selected, the item will be backflushed when it is used
backflushing as a component in the product structure of another item.

Backflush materials If this check box is selected, you can backflush the material that is
required to produce the item.

Backflush hours If this check box is selected, you can backflush the hours spent to
manufacture the item to a backflush employee.

Operations
In order to activate backflushing for operations, the Backflushing check box must be enabled in the
Routing Operations session for each operation related to the main item.

Exercise 5.1: Enable and activate backflushing

In this exercise, you will define backflushing and the operations data for the items.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Enable backflushing for materials and hours

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Item - Production. The Item –
Production session opens.
2. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
3. Press Enter to apply the filter.
4. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S100. The Item - Production detail session opens.

110 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 5. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
6. Click to select the following check boxes:
• Materials
• Hours
7. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production detail session. The Item
– Production session displays.
8. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S110. The Item - Production detail session opens.
9. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
10. Click to select the Allow Backflushing check box in the As Material section.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production detail session. The
Items – Production session displays.
12. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S121. The Item - Production detail session opens.
13. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
14. Click to select the Allow Backflushing check box in the As Material section.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Production detail session. The
Items – Production session displays.
16. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130. The Items - Production detail session opens.
17. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
18. Click to select the Allow Backflushing check box in the As Material section.
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items - Production detail session.
20. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items - Production session.

Part 2: Activate backflushing for operations

1. Click Options > Run Program. The Run Program window opens.
2. Type timfc1500m000 in the Open field.
3. Click the OK button. The Production Item 360 session opens.
4. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.
5. Press Enter to apply the filter.
6. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
7. Click the Routings link. The Item - Routings session opens.
8. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S100. The Routing Operations session opens.
9. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
10. Click the Operational tab.
11. Click to select the Backflushing check box in the Properties section.
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
13. Click the Go to Details button for operation 20. The Routing Operations detail session opens.

111 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 14. Click the Operational tab.
15. Click to select the Backflushing check box in the Properties section.
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Routings session.
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Item 360 session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

112 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

Production process with backflushing
Create production order
To create a production order with backflushing, backflushing for materials and hours must be enabled,
and backflushing for operations must be activated.
To review and confirm that these settings are enabled, after creating the production order, you can use
the References menu in the Production Order session to open the Production Order detail session, then
click the Quantities tab to verify the Materials and Hours check boxes are enabled.
In addition, on the Materials tab of the Production Order session, you can click the Go to Details button
for each operation to open the Estimated Materials session, then click the Inventory Data tab to verify that
the Backflushing check box is selected. On the Operations tab you can click the Go to Details button for
each operation to open the Production Planning sessions, then click the Quantity tab to verify that the
Backflush Hours check box is selected.

Report order completed/backflush materials and hours

During this part of the process, after releasing the order, when clicking Report Complete, you are asked if
you want to backflush materials/hours immediately. After clicking Yes, materials are automatically issued
from inventory, and the hours spent manufacturing the items are automatically accounted for, based on
theoretical usage and the quantity of the item reported as complete.

Scenario: Production process with backflushing

As part of our business case, now that the S100 Circa smartphone has been in continuous
production for 6 months, and the materials and hours have been calculated and are
standard, with no need for manual issue, you are ready to produce it using backflushing.
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

113 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 Exercise 5.2: Create production order
In this exercise, you will create a production order for the item with backflushing.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders. The Production Orders session
opens.
2. Click the New button. The Production Order session opens with SFC populated in the
Production Order field.
3. Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item field.
4. Type 10 in the Quantity Ordered field.
5. Press Tab eight times to navigate to the Requested Delivery field.
6. Click the Save button. The Operations tab list view is automatically populated, a [production
order number] is automatically generated and displays in the Production Order field.
7. Write down your production order number: _____________________.
8. Click References on the header menu bar.
9. Click the Production Order Details menu item. The Production Order detail session opens.
10. Click the Quantities tab.
11. Verify the Hours check box is selected.
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order detail session. The
Production Order session displays.
13. Click the Materials tab.
14. Click the Go to Details button for position 10. The Estimated Materials session opens.
15. Click the Inventory Data tab.
16. Verify Backflush is selected in the Report Material drop-down list in the Issue Method section.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays.
18. Click the Go to Details button for position 20. The Estimated Materials session opens.
19. Click the Inventory Data tab.
20. Verify Backflush is selected in the Report Material drop-down list in the Issue Method section.
21. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays.
22. Click the Go to Details button for position 30.

114 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 23. Click the Inventory Data tab.
24. Verify Backflush is selected in the Report Material drop-down list in the Issue Method section.
25. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Materials session. The
Production Order session displays
26. Click the Operations tab.
27. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Production Planning session opens.
28. Click the Quantity tab.
29. Verify Backflush is selected in the Report Labor Hours drop-down list in the Backflushing
section.
30. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Planning session. The
Production Order session displays.
31. Click the Go to Details button for operation 20. The Production Planning session opens.
32. Click the Quantity tab.
33. Verify Backflush is selected in the Report Labor Hours drop-down list in the Backflushing
section.
34. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Planning session. The
Production Order session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Order session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

115 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 Exercise 5.3: Print order documents and release order
In this exercise, you will print the backflushing production order documents and release the
order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Order session is open for [your production order number].

Exercise steps
1. Click the Print button in the menu header bar. The Print Production Order Documents session
opens.
2. Click the Documents tab.
3. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Order Covering Note
• Subcontracting Note
• Order Distribution
• Serial Number List
4. Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
5. Click the Display tab.
6. Type D in the Device field.
7. Click the Continue button. The Order Covering Note report opens.
8. Review the details of the Routing Sheet and Material List in the report.
9. Click the Close (X) button to close the Order Covering Note report. The Print Production
Order Documents session displays.
10. Click the Close button to close the Print Production Order Documents session. The
Production Order session displays.
11. Click the Release Order button on the header menu bar. Released now displays next to the
Production Order field in the header.
12. Click the Save button. Note: Do not close the Production Order session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

116 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 Exercise 5.4: Report order completed
In this exercise, you will report the backflushing production order as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Order session is open for [your production order number].

Exercise steps
1. Click Actions on the header menu bar.
2. Click the Report Order Completed menu option. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
3. Type 10 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field.
4. Press Tab. 10 is automatically populated in the Quantity to Deliver field.
5. Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
6. Click the Production Completed list item.
7. Click the Save button. The Report Orders completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
8. Click the Yes button. The Delivery Date fields are automatically populated.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Order session displays. Completed now displays next to the Production Order
field.
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
11. Verify the check box for [your production order number] is selected in the Production Order
column.
12. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Material Costs session opens.
13. Review the estimated and actual quantities displayed in the list view.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Material Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays.
15. Verify the check box for [your production order number] is still selected in the Production
Order column.
16. Click References > Costs > Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs. The Estimated vs. Actual
Hours Costs session opens.
17. Review the estimated and actual hours displayed in the list view.

117 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated vs. Actual Hours Costs
session. The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 5.5: Close production order

In this exercise, you will close the production order created for the items with backflushing.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
selected.
19. Click the Actions menu.
20. Click the Close Orders menu item. The Close Production Orders session opens.
21. Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
22. Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
23. Click the Display tab.
24. Type D in the Device field.
25. Click the Continue button. The Close Production Orders (Process Report) report opens. A
message on the report indicates the order was processed successfully.
26. Click the Close (X) button to close the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report. The
Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report opens.
27. Review the data in the report.

118 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

 28. Click the Close (X) button to close the Order Results (Financial Transactions) report. The
Production Orders session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status column for [your
production order] number.
29. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

119 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

Check your understanding

In order to enable backflushing in production for materials and hours, which check boxes
must be enabled for an item in the Item - Production session?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

In order to enable backflushing for operations, which check box must be enabled in the
Routing Operations session for each operation related to the main item?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

The steps for how to process a production order with backflushing appear below in the
wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create production order

Print production order documents and release order

Backflush materials and hours

Report order completed

Close production order

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

120 Lesson 5: Production with backflushing

Lesson 6: Subcontracting
Estimated time
5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to use subcontracting in production.
• Explain how to maintain master data for subcontracting.
• Explain how to process production orders with subcontracting with material flow.

Topics
• Overview
• Master data for subcontracting
• Production process with subcontracting

121 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Overview
Companies can decide to involve a subcontractor and subcontract part of their activities. The
subcontractor carries out the work and returns the products to your company.
In Infor LN, subcontracting is considered as purchasing labour from a third party. Therefore, if a
manufacturer wants to subcontract work, he or she must generate a purchase order to start the
subcontracting process.

Subcontracting without material flow support

The simplest form of subcontracting is to generate a subcontracting purchase order to record the
operations outsourced to a subcontractor. The subcontracting purchase order only represents the
administrative handling of the subcontracting process.
When the subcontracted item is received back from the subcontractor, you must close the subcontracting
purchase order, which is the signal to continue with the production process. Neither the physical handling
of the subcontracted item nor sending material to the subcontractor is supported.

Subcontracting with material flow support

A more extensive way of subcontracting in Infor LN includes not only outsourcing work, but also the
supply and receipt of the required material. Infor LN supports the physical and administrative flow of
subassemblies as well as the required material. After the subcontractor has finished the activities on the
subcontracted items the items are shipped back to the manufacturer.
You can use the following types of subcontracting:
• Operation subcontracting, where part of production process (one or more operations) is
subcontracted
• Item subcontracting, where the entire production process is subcontracted
In our scenario, one operation of the production process will be outsourced, and the required material is
delivered to the subcontractor. As part of this process, an operation of a particular production process will
be defined as a default subcontracting operation, and the intermediate product must be sent to the
subcontractor. For the intermediate product, you must assign a subassembly to the operation that is sent
to the subcontractor. Additional materials that are also assigned to the operation are also sent to the
subcontractor. Once the operation is completed by the subcontractor a subassembly is sent back. In Infor
LN these subassemblies are defined as purchased items.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

122 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Master data for subcontracting
To perform the production order process with subcontracting, master data must be defined first. For
purposes of training, most of the required master data has already been set up in the training
environment, using the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Subcontracting master data flow in Infor LN

Implemented software components

To use subcontracting with material flow in production, you must ensure that the Subcontracting with
Material Flow check box is selected in the Implemented Software Components (tccom0100s000) session.
This check box is available in the Production section of the Concepts (Logistics) tab on this session.
In addition, for our scenario, you will ensure that the Demand Pegging check box located in the Planning
section of the Concepts (Logistics) tab is not enabled.

Business partner data

Subcontractor business partner data must be defined using the Business Partners (tccom4500m000)
session.
To process material provision, you must define a warehouse that is assigned to a subcontractor
(Business Partner). In addition to the four purchase roles, you must also assign the Sold-To and Ship-To
roles to this business partner.

123 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Warehouse data
Define an administrative warehouse in the Warehouses (whwmd2500m000) session. The administrative
warehouse reflects the external warehouse at the subcontractor's location. Select the Include in
Enterprise Planning check box.
A subcontractor warehouse must be assigned to the subcontractor business partner to process the
material provision; this can also be done in the Warehouses session.

Warehousing procedures and order types

To prevent having to process the receipt of goods at the subcontractor´s site, an automatic procedure is
defined for the warehouse receipt using the Warehousing Procedures (whinh0105m000) session. In
addition, a specific warehousing order type must be created for subcontracting using the Warehousing
Order Types (whinh0110m000) session.

Default order type by origin

A default order type specific to subcontracting must also be defined for transfers between warehouses
using the Default Order Types by Origin (whinh0120m000) session.

Purchase order type

For a subcontracting order with material flow you must also define a specific purchase order type using
the Purchase Order Types (tdpur0194m000) session.
Before proceeding with creating the rest of the master data for our scenario, you will review the
preconfigured subcontracting setup and master data.

Demo 6.1: Review subcontracting setup and master data

This demonstration shows how to review the subcontracting setup and master data.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises because they provide data or
configurations for this demonstration.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your
student user account]. If not, refer to Exercise 2.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

If you are taking this course as instructor-led training, the instructor will complete this demo.

124 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Part 1: Review implemented software components
1. Click Master Data > Enterprise Model > Company Data > Implemented Software
Components. The Implemented Software Components session opens.
2. Click the Go to Details button for the Actual set line (without introduction date). The
Implemented Software Components detail session opens.
3. Click the Concepts (Logistics) tab.
4. Verify the Demand Pegging check box in the Planning section is cleared.
5. Verify the Subcontracting with Material Flow check box is selected in the Production section.
6. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Implemented Software Components
detail session.
7. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Implemented Software Components
session.

Part 2: Review business partner data

1. Click Master Data > Business Partners > Business Partners.
2. Click the Go to Details button for business partner BPG000015. The Business Partner session
opens.
3. Verify ADD000006 is populated in the Address field.
Note: You may have to pull the Activities panel down to view the fields in the top portion of the
session.
4. Click the Sold-to button in the Roles section. The Sold-to Business Partner session opens.
5. Click the Shipping tab.
6. Click the Warehouses button. The Warehouses session opens.
7. Review the contents of the list view. WSUB displays in the list view.
8. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouses session. The Sold-to
Business Partner session displays.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Sold-to Business Partner session. The
Business Partner session displays.
10. Click the Ship-to button. The Ship-to Business Partner session opens.
11. Click the Shipping tab.
12. Review the value in the Ship-to Warehouse field. WSUB displays in this field.
13. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Ship-to Business Partner session.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Business Partner session.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Business Partners session.

Part 3: Review warehouse data

1. Click Warehousing > Master Data > Warehouses > Warehouses.
2. Click the Go to Details button for warehouse WSUB. The Warehouses session opens.
3. Verify ADD000006 is populated in the Address field.

125 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 4. Click the Relationships tab.
5. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Inventory Management section

Inventory Management Clear

(check box)

Business Partner (field) BPG000015

Site section

Business Partner (field) BPG000015

Business Partner section

Sold-to (field) BGP000015

Ship-to (field) BGP000015

Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouse session.
6. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouses session.

Part 4: Review and configure the order type

1. Click Warehousing > Master Data > Order Procedures > Order Types. The Warehousing
Order Types session opens.
2. Click the Go to Details button for order type WSR. The Warehousing Order Type session
opens.
3. Review the value in the Receipt Procedure field in the Inbound section. The value is WR2.
4. Review the contents of the Receipt Activities tab list view.
• The check box in the Applicable column is selected for the following activities:
o Print Goods Received Note.
o Warehouse Receipt
o Generate Inbound Advice
o Put Away Inbound Advice
• The check box in the Automatic column is selected for the following activities:
o Generate Inbound Advice
o Put Away Inbound Advice
Click to select the check box in the Automatic column for the Warehouse Receipt activity.

126 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 5. Click the Inspection Activities tab. Notice that no check boxes are selected for the activities in
the list view.
6. Click the Outbound Advice Activities tab. Notice that the check boxes in the Applicable and
Automatic columns are selected for the following activities:
• Generate Outbound Advice
• Release Outbound Advice
7. Click the Shipment Activities tab. Notice that the check box in the Applicable column is
selected for the Freeze/Confirm Shipments/Loads activity.
8. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order Type session. The
Warehousing Order Types session displays.
9. Click the Go to Details button for order type ISS. The Warehousing Order Type session opens.
10. Review the value in the Outbound Advice Procedure field in the Outbound section. The value
is D01.
11. Review the contents of the Outbound Advice Activities tab list view.
• The check box in the Applicable column is selected for the following activities:
o Generate Outbound Advice
o Release Outbound Advice
o Generate Picking List
o Picking list
• The check box in the Automatic column is selected for the following activities:
o Generate Outbound Advice
o Release Outbound Advice
o Generate Picking List
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order Type session. The
Warehousing Order Types session displays.
13. Click the Go to Details button for order type WH2. The Warehousing Order Type session
opens.
14. Review the value in the Receipt Procedure field in the Inbound section. The value is WR4.
15. Review the contents of the Receipt Activities tab list view. Notice that:
• The check box in the Applicable column is selected for the Warehouse Receipt activity.
• The check boxes in both the Applicable and the Automatic column are selected for the
following activities:
o Generate Inbound Advice
o Put Away Inbound Advice
16. Click to select the check box in the Automatic column for the Warehouse Receipt activity.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order Type session.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order Types session.

Part 5: Review default order types by origin

1. Click Warehousing > Master Data > Order Procedures > Default Order Types by Origin.

127 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 2. Click the Search button. The Default Order Types by Origin – Search window opens.
3. Click the Clear Fields button.
4. Verify the Order Origin, Inventory Transaction Type, Ship-From/To radio button is selected.
5. Click the Order Origin drop-down arrow.
6. Click the Transfer list item.
7. Click the OK button. The Default Order Types by Origin session displays.
8. Click the Go to Details button for transaction type Transfer. The Default Order Types by Origin
detail session opens.
9. Verify WSR is populated in the Order Type field.
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Default Order Types by Origin detail
session.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Default Order Types by Origin session.

Part 6: Review purchase order types

1. Click Procurement > Master Data > Orders > Order Types. The Purchase Order Types
session opens.
2. Click the Go to Details button for purchase order type SCP. The Purchase Order Type session
opens.
3. Review the following values in the following fields:
• In the header, the Subcontracting Order check box in the Controls section is selected.
• In the list view, the check box in the Automatic column is selected and D is populated in the
Device column for each of the following activities:
o Generate Supply Orders for Subcontracting
o Print Purchase Orders
o Release Purchase Orders to Warehousing
o Process Delivered Purchase Orders
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Purchase Order Type session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Purchase Order Types session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

128 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Item – purchase data
The purchase price of a subcontracted item or subassembly is defined in the Items - Purchase
(tdipu0101m000) session using the Subcontracting Purchase Price field in the Operation Subcontracting
section. This field is also used to calculate the subcontracting operation costs in the Standard Cost
Calculation module of Manufacturing.
For operation subcontracting, this price is used if the Source of Price field is set to Price Book / Contract.
If the Source of Price is set to Subcontracting Rate, this price is not used; except if you perform a price
recalculation for the purchase order.

Subcontracting model
The Subcontracting Models (tisub1100m000) session is used to manage models for subcontracting
manufacture of subassemblies or end product. In our scenario, you will use this session to define a
subcontracting model for item [XX]-S130.
Step 1. Create subcontracting model or revision
A subcontracting model contains all the data needed for subcontracting. From the Subcontracting Models
(tisub1100m000) you can:
• Generate a new subcontracting model
The New command in the Subcontracting Models session starts the Subcontracting Model
(tisub1600m000) session.
o Select the Product and the item from which it is derived.
o The Revision is automatically generated starting with revision 0001.
o Select the Subcontractor.
▪ The Ship-from Business Partner and Subcontractor Warehouse linked to the
subcontractor are generated automatically.
▪ If multiple ship-from business partners, or warehouses are defined you can manually
change the selection.
o Specify the quantity of product subcontracted in the BOM Quantity field.
o Specify the Effective Date and Expiry Date for the subcontracting model.
• Generate a new revision of an existing subcontracting model
Select a subcontracting model from the list.
o With the New Revision command, a new subcontracting model with an updated Revision
based on the old revision number is generated.
o Specify the new Effective Date, and set the Status to New.
A new subcontracting model, or new revision with the status New, must be validated before use:
• Select the subcontracting model you want validated.
• Select the Validate Subcontracting Model command that will open the Validate Subcontracting
Model (tisub1200m000) session.
• Select the subcontracting model(s) and revision(s) for validation.
• Once the subcontracting model is validated, you can set the status of the previous revision
to Expired.
• Set the status of the current revision to Approved.
Step 2. Maintain subcontracting bill of material
You can maintain the bill of materials for subcontracted items in the Subcontracting Bill of Material
(tisub1110m000) session or in the Materials tab of the Subcontracting Model session.

129 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 • Specify a new bill of material
o You must add materials needed by the subcontractor to make the product along with
quantities, and scrap percentages for the required material.
o For each material the Supply System and supplying Warehouse must be specified.
• Import a bill of material from Job Shop
o You can also import a bill of materials from the Bill of Material (tibom1110m000) session.
o The Import Bill of Material command starts the Import Bill of Material to Subcontracting Model
session.
o Once you have selected the Product, Subcontractor, Ship-from Business Partner and
Revision you can import the bill of material with the Import command.

Work centers
If an operation will be outsourced, you must define a subcontract work center for this process. This work
center has to be linked to the subcontractor and the external warehouse.
In our scenario, you will create a new work center for subcontracting activities and assign the
subcontractor to the work center.

Items
In our scenario, you will define the end item that you want to subcontract ([XX]-S130) and create the
subassembly items.
• End item
o In the Item - Production (tiipd0101m000) session, find the end item for which you subcontract
one or more operations, and for which you want to support the material flow.
o Select the Subcontracting with Material Flow check box for this item.
o Calculate the end item's standard cost (top-down) in the Calculate Standard Cost
(ticpr2210m000) session.
• Subassemblies
o In the Item detail session, define two items for which the Customized check box is selected.
o These items represent respectively the subassembly sent by the manufacturer to the
subcontractor, and the subassembly sent back by the subcontractor after work is done.
o If you want to leave open the possibility to produce the item yourself instead of sending it to a
subcontractor, set the item type of the subassembly that you receive back from the
subcontractor to Manufactured or Product.
o If the manufacturer sends no subassembly to the subcontractor but only material, you just
need to define an item code for the subassembly created by the subcontractor.
Define the following data for the subassemblies:
o Warehouse
▪ In the Item - Ordering (tcibd2100m000) session, find the defined subassemblies.
▪ For the subassembly that you will send to the subcontractor, enter in the Warehouse field
the warehouse from which you send the subassembly.
▪ For the subassembly that you receive back from the subcontractor, enter the warehouse
in which you receive the subassembly.
o Standard Cost
▪ To generate an effective cost component structure, define the assemblies' costing data in
the Item - Costing (ticpr0107m000) session.

130 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 ▪ Calculate and actualize the standard cost in the Calculate Standard Cost
(ticpr2210m000) session while the Actualize Standard Cost and Revalue Inventory check
box is selected.
o Supply
▪ Subassemblies are sent to the subcontractor by means of a purchase subcontracting
order, which is an order-specific supply.
▪ In the Item Data by Warehouse (whwmd2510m000) details session, you must therefore
define the supply system Order Controlled / Single for the correct combination of the
subassembly that you will send to the subcontractor and the administrative warehouse.
Note that for a subassembly, this is the only supply system you can use.
o Price
▪ For the item that is sent back by the subcontractor, you must determine the price you will
pay to the subcontractor.
▪ In the Items - Purchase (tdipu0101m000) session, use the Source of Price field to choose
between Subcontracting Rate and Price Book / Contract to determine the price.
▪ Note that if you subcontract the last operation, you must define the price for the end item
instead of for the subassembly.
▪ If the Source of Price field in the Items - Purchase (tdipu0101m000) session is:
• Subcontracting Rate, you must define subcontracting rates in the Subcontracting
Rates (ticpr1160m000) session. Define the rate by task for the correct combination of
project, price calculation code, parent item or subcontractor.
• Price Book / Contract, the Subcontracting Rates (ticpr1160m000) session is also
relevant, because the tasks' cost components are defined in this session. You can
leave the Project, Parent item, and Subassembly fields empty.

Warehouse - item data

In our scenario, you will also define the item warehouse data for the new items that will be sent to the
subcontractor, items S133 (Documentation) and S130-OUT (Subassembly). You must also identify from
which internal warehouse the material shall be issued.

BOM and routing

In the Bill of Material session, you will create the subcontracted item's BOM.
If the Supplied by Subcontractor check box is cleared, the components are sent to the subcontractor to be
used in the subcontracted item (S130-IN). If this check box is selected, the components are directly
supplied by the subcontractor.
In our scenario, you will add the new item S133 to the BOM of item S130 and link the operation to the
BOM line. Then you will define the subassembly and the work center for the operations of the routing for
item S130.

Subcontracting rates
Subcontracting rates can be specified in the Subcontracting Rates (ticpr1160m000) session by cost
calculation code, subcontractor, and operation.
How subcontracting costs are calculated, and consequently, how the subcontracting rate must be
interpreted, depends on the Rate Base field in the Subcontracting Rates (ticpr1160m000) details session.
This field can be set to:

131 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 • Fixed Amount by Product
o The costs or prices are calculated by multiplying the end item quantity displayed in the
Ordered Quantity field in the Purchase Order Lines (tdpur4101m000) session by the
subcontracting rate.
o Select this method if the subcontracting costs are directly related to the number of
subcontracting items. The subcontracting costs are based on the gross input of the end
items.
• Hour
o If the method is hour rate, the costs or prices are calculated by multiplying the estimated man
or machine hours by the subcontracting rate.
o The estimated man or machine hours are calculated using the operation planning data such
as gross end-item quantity, cycle time, and man and machine occupation.

Calculate standard costs

Next in our scenario, you will calculate standard costs for the main item and subassembly. Items S130-
OUT and S130-IN are subassembly items and are intentionally set up to have zero cost.

Validate subcontracting settings

The Validate Subcontracting Settings of Routing Operations (tirou1215m000) session is used to validate
routings with subcontracting operations. Any errors are printed in a report.

Checks
The session checks the settings for all operations performed on work centers for which the work center
type is Subcontracting Work Center. Which checks are performed depends on whether the
Subcontracting with Material Flow check box is selected in the Item - Production (tiipd0101m000)
session.
In case of subcontracting with material flow support, Infor LN performs these checks:
• Infor LN checks BOM loops: a sub item is not allowed to occur in the parent path.
o If the main item has subcontracting with material flow support, Infor LN checks all BOM levels
until it finds a phantom, for which Subcontracting with Material Flow is "No."
o Infor LN then checks the routing of this phantom and searches, one level higher in the BOM,
for the next phantom.
• The following checks are performed:
Note: For non-Standard Configuration routings, these checks are performed only if you select
Specific in the Configuration field, and if the operation is valid for the selected Effectivity Unit.
o Subcontracting rates must exist for the subcontracting work center.
o The Subassembly field in the Routing Operations (tirou1102m000) session must have a
value if the operation is a subcontracting operation, or the next operation is a subcontracting
operation. Note: this rule does not apply if no next operation exists or the next operation is a
subcontracting operation for the same subcontractor.
o If the last operation of a main item or phantom routing is subcontracted, the Subassembly
Warehouse field in the Routing Operations (tirou1102m000) session must have a value.
o Each item entered as subassembly in the Subassembly field in the Routing Operations
(tirou1102m000) session must have a standard cost and cost structure.
o If a phantom has a standard routing, the project segment of subassemblies defined on the
phantom's routing must be empty or equal to the project segment of the end item.

132 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 o If an operation is performed on a subcontracting work center, that work center must have a
shop floor warehouse.
o For the shop floor warehouse of a subcontracting work center to which a subassembly is
moved, the subassembly's supply system must be Order Controlled/Single.
o If a subassembly's supply warehouse or a subcontracting work center's shop floor warehouse
have been defined, they must be equal to the warehouse defined for the subassembly in the
Item - Ordering (tcibd2100m000) session.

Exercise 6.2: Create item – purchase data

In this exercise, you will create item purchase data for item [XX]-S130.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
2. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item filter field.
3. Press Enter to apply the filter.
4. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130. The Items detail session opens.
5. Click the Production button. The Item - Production session opens.
6. Click the Job Shop BOM tab.
7. Verify the Subcontracting with Material Flow check box is selected.
8. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
9. Click the Purchase button. The Item - Purchase session opens.
10. Click the Zoom button in the Buy-from BP field. The Buy-from Business Partners session
opens.
11. Click to select the check box for BPG000015 in the Buy-from Business Partners column.
12. Click the OK button. The Items – Purchase session displays.
13. Type USD in the Currency field.
14. Click the Zoom button in the Purchase Price Unit field. The Units by Unit Set session opens.
15. Click to select the check box for ea in the Unit column.
16. Click the OK button. The Item - Purchase session displays.
17. Click the Zoom button in the Purchase Price Group field. The Price Groups session opens.
18. Click to select the check box for 200 in the Price Group column.
19. Click the OK button. The Item - Purchase session displays.

133 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 20. Click the Zoom button in the Purchase Unit field. The Units by Unit Set session opens.
21. Click to select the check box for ea in the Unit column.
22. Click the OK button. The Item - Purchase session displays.
23. Click the Zoom button in the Purchase Stat. Group field. The Statistical Groups session
opens.
24. Click to select the check box for 001 in the Statistical Group column.
25. Click the OK button. The Item - Purchase session displays.
26. Click the New button on the Item – Business Partner tab menu. A new line displays with
BPG000015 populated in the Buy-from Business Partner field.
27. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Purchase session.
28. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session.
29. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.3: Define subcontracting model

In this exercise, you will define a subcontracting model for item [XX]-S130.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Subcontracting > Subcontracting Models. The Subcontracting
Models session opens.
Click the New button. The Subcontracting Model session opens.
Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Product field.
Press Tab. 1 displays in the BOM Quantity field.
Verify [today’s date] is populated in the first segment of the Effective Date field.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.

134 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Expiry Date field.
Click the [December 31st of next year] option. The first segment of the Expiry Date field is
populated.
Type 12:00 AM in in the second segment of the Expiry Date field.
Click the Zoom button in the Subcontractor field. The Items – Purchase Business Partner
session opens.
Click to select the check box for BPG000015 in the Buy-from Business Partner column.
Click the OK button. The Subcontracting Model session displays. BPG000015 is populated in
both the Subcontractor and the Ship-from BP fields.
Click the Zoom button in the Subcontractor Warehouse field. The Warehouses session
opens.
Click to select the check box for WSUB in the Warehouse column.
Click the OK button. The Subcontracting Model session displays.
Click the Save button.
Click Actions on the Materials tab menu bar.
Click the Import Bill of Material menu item. The Import Bill of Material to Subcontracting
Model session opens.
Click the Reference Date calendar button.
Click the Today button. Today’s date populates in the Reference Date field.
Type 12am in the second segment of the Reference Date field.
Press Tab. Two line items display.
Click to select both check boxes in the Position column (10 and 20).
Click the Import button. The Import Bill of Material to Subcontracting Model dialog box
opens with the message: “Bill of Material successfully imported to the Subcontracting Model.”
Click the OK button. The Subcontracting Model session displays.
Review the contents of the Materials tab list view.
Click the Business Partner tab.
Review the contents of the Business Partner tab list view.
Click Actions on the header menu bar.
Click the Validate menu item. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Validate Subcontracting Models report opens.
Review the Validate Subcontracting Models report. In the Validation Messages section, the
following message displays: “No blocking errors found in Subcontracting Model [XX]-
S130/BPG000015BPG000015/nnnnnn.”
Click the Close (X) button to close the Validate Subcontracting Models report. The
Subcontracting Model displays.

135 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Subcontracting Model session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Subcontracting Models session.

Exercise 6.4: Create a work center

In this exercise, you will create a new work center for subcontracting activities and assign the
subcontractor to the work center.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Shop Layout > Work Centers. The Work Centers session
opens.
Click the New button. The Work Centers detail session opens.
Click the Work Center Type drop-down arrow.
Click the Subcontracting list item.
Type [XX]-90 in the Work Center field.
Type Subcontracting in the Description field.
Click the Zoom button in the Address field. The Addresses session opens.
Click to select the check box for ADD000006 in the Address Code column.
Click the OK button. The Work Center session displays.
Press Tab. Grand Rapids displays in the City (Letterhead) field.
Type 001 in the Enterprise Unit field.
Type STD in the first segment of the Work Center Calendar field.
Press Tab.
Type GEN in the second segment of the Work Center Calendar field.
Click the Relationships tab.
Click the Zoom button in the Subcontractor field. The Buy-from Business Partners session
opens.
Click to select the check box for BPG0000015 in the Buy-from Business Partner column.
Click the OK button. The Work Center session displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Shop Floor Warehouse field. The Warehouses session opens.

136 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Click to select the check box for WSUB in the Warehouse column.
Click the OK button. The Work Center session displays
Click the Planning tab.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Basic Week Capacity 40

Basic Day Capacity 8

Number of Machines 1

Available Labor Resources 0

Wait Time 2

Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers detail session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Work Centers session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.5: Define items

In this exercise, you will define the subcontracting production data.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create new item [XX]-S130-OUT

1. Click Master Data > Items > Items.

137 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 2. Click the New button. The Items detail session opens.
3. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S130-OUT

Description Subassembly Outgoing

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Manual

Subassembly (checkbox) Select

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

4. Click the Save button. A green check mark displays next to each of the following buttons in the
Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Ordering
• Production
• Purchase
• Costing
5. Click the Ordering button. The Item – Ordering session opens.
6. Verify MAIN is populated in the Warehouse field.
7. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
8. Click the Production button. The Item - Production session opens.
9. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
10. Verify the following check boxes are selected:
• Allow Backflushing
• Direct Process Warehouse Order Line
11. Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
12. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.

Part 2: Copy item [XX]-S130-OUT to create new item [XX]-S130-IN

1. Verify the check box for [XX]-S130-OUT in the Item column is selected.

138 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 2. Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
3. Type [XX]-S130-IN in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
4. Type Subassembly Incoming in the Description field.
5. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Item Text
• Business Partners by Item
6. Click to select the Calculate Standard Cost and Valuation Price check box.
7. Click the Copy button.
8. Click the Close button to close the Copy Item Data session. The Items session displays.
9. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130-IN. The Items detail session opens.
10. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S130-IN

Description Subassembly Incoming

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Manual

Subassembly (checkbox) Select

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

11. Click the Production button. The Item - Production session opens.
12. Click the Job Shop Process tab.
13. Verify the following check boxes are selected:
• Allow Backflushing
• Direct Process Warehouse Order Line
14. Click the OK button. The Items - Production session closes.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.

139 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Part 3: Copy item [XX]-S121 to create new item [XX]-S133 (Documentation)
1. Click to clear the check box for [XX]-S130-IN, if it is selected.
2. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S121 in the Item column.
3. Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
4. Type [XX]-S133 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
5. Type Documentation in the Description field.
6. Click to clear the Item text check box.
7. Click to select the Calculate Standard Cost and Valuation Price check box.
8. Click the Copy button.
9. Click the Close button. The Items session displays.
10. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S133. The Items detail session opens.
11. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Item (second segment) [XX]-S133

Description Documentation

Item Type Purchased

Item Group PUR002

Order System Planned

Subassembly (checkbox) Clear

Unit Set 001

Inventory Unit ea

12. Review the Subentities section. A green check mark displays next to each of the following
buttons in the Subentities section:
• Warehousing
• Planning
• Costing
• Ordering
• Production
• Purchase
13. Click the Purchase button. The Item - Purchase session opens.
14. Type 1 in the Purchase Price field.

140 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 15. Click the Save button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Latest
Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
16. Click the Yes button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace
Average Purchase Price by Actual Purchase Price?”
17. Click the Yes button.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items - Purchase session. The Items detail
session displays.
19. Click the Warehousing button. The Item – Warehousing session opens.
20. Click the New Warehouse button on the Warehouses tab menu bar. The Item Data by
Warehouse session opens.
21. Type WSUB in the Warehouse field.
22. Press Tab.
23. Click the Supply tab.
24. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Supply System Order Controlled/Single

Supply from Warehouse Selected

(checkbox)

Supply Warehouse MAIN

24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item Data by Warehouse session.
25. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Warehousing session.
26. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session.
27. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

141 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Exercise 6.6: Define warehouse – item data
In this exercise, you will define the item warehouse data and create an adjustment order for
the new items that must be sent to the subcontractor.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define item warehouse data for [XX]-S130-OUT

1. Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
2. Type [XX]-S130-OUT in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
3. Press Enter to filter the results.
4. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130-OUT. The Items detail session opens.
5. Click the Warehousing button. The Item – Warehousing session opens.
6. Click the Go to Details button for the MAIN warehouse. The Item Data by Warehouse session
opens.
7. Click the Supply tab.
8. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Supply System Order Controlled/Single

Supply from Warehouse Cleared

(checkbox)

9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item Data by Warehouse session. The
Item – Warehousing session displays.
10. Click the New Warehouse button on Warehouses tab menu bar. The Item Data by Warehouse
session opens.
11. Type WSUB in the Warehouse field.
12. Press Tab.
13. Click the Supply tab.
14. Verify, type or click to select the following information from the table below:

142 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Field / check box Value

Supply System Order Controlled/Single

Supply from Warehouse Selected

(checkbox)

Supply Warehouse MAIN

15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item Data by Warehouse session.
16. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Warehousing session.
17. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

Part 2: Create an adjustment order

1. Click Warehousing > Cycle Counting/Adjustment Orders > Adjustment Orders.
2. Click the New button. The Adjustment Order session opens.
3. Click the Zoom button in the Warehouse field. The Warehouses session opens.
4. Click to select the check box for MAIN in the Warehouse column.
5. Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
6. Click the Zoom button in the Reason for Adjustment field. The Reasons session opens.
7. Click to select the check box for ADJ001 in the Reason column.
8. Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
9. Click the New Line button on the Lines tab menu bar. A new line displays with 10 populated in
the Line column.
10. Type [XX]-S133 in the second segment of the Item field.
11. Type 1002 in the Location field.
12. Type 1000 in the Inventory Adjusted field.
13. Press Tab. 1000 is automatically populated in the Variance field.
14. Click the Save button.
15. Click the Process button on the header menu bar. The Adjustment Order dialog box opens with
the message: “End of process.”
16. Click the OK button. Processed displays in the Status field (next to the Order field in the
header), and the [adjustment order number] is populated in the Order field.
17. Write down your adjustment order number: ______________________________.
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Order session. The
Adjustment Orders session displays. A green check mark now displays in the Manual
Adjustment column for [your adjustment order].
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Orders session.

143 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Exercise 6.7: Define BOM and routing
In this exercise, you will add the new item [XX]-S133 to the BOM of item [XX]-S130 and link
the operation to the BOM line. Then you will define the subassembly and the work center for
the operations of the routing for item [XX]-S130.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define BOM

1. Click Options > Run Program. The Run Program window opens.
2. Type timfc1500m000 in the Open field.
3. Click the OK button. The Production Item 360 session opens.
4. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
5. Press Enter to filter the results.
6. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S130 in the Item column.
7. Click the Bill of Material link. The Bill of Material session opens.
8. Click the New button. A new line displays with 30 populated in the Position field.
9. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Item [XX]-S133

Net Quantity 1

Warehouse MAIN

Operation 20

Effective Date [January 1st of the current year]

(first segment)

Effective Date 12:00 AM

(second segment)

144 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session. The Production
Item 360 session displays.

Part 2: Operations
1. Verify the check box for [XX]-S130 in the Item column is still selected.
2. Click the Routings link. The Item – Routings session opens.
3. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130. The Routing Operations session opens.
4. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
5. Click the Operational tab.
6. Type [XX]-S130-OUT in the second segment of the Subassembly field.
7. Press Tab.
8. Verify MAIN is populated in the Subassembly Warehouse field.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
10. Click the Go to Details button for operation 20. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
11. Click the Zoom button in the Work Center field. The Routing Operations window opens.
12. Verify the Work Centers radio button is selected.
13. Click the OK button. The Work Centers session opens.
14. Click to select [XX]-90 in the Work Center column.
15. Click the OK button. The Routing Operations detail session displays.
16. Press Tab.
17. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Setup Time 0

Cycle Time 0

Wait Time 2

18. Click the Operational tab.

19. Type [XX]-S130-IN in the second segment of the Subassembly field.
20. Press Tab.
21. Verify MAIN is populated in the Subassembly Warehouse field.
22. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session.
23. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Routings session.

145 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 25. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Item 360 session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.8: Define subcontracting rates

In this exercise, you will define the subcontracting operation costs for the subcontractor for
the task.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Subcontracting > Subcontracting Rates.
2. Click the New View button.
3. Verify 001 is populated in the Cost Calculation Code field.
4. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Parent Item field.
5. Press Tab.
6. Click the New button. A new line displays.
7. Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Subcontractor (first BPG000015

segment)

Reference Operation [XX]-50

Rate 1

Currency USD

146 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Field / check box Value

Cost Component 500

Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Subcontracting Rates session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.9: Calculate standard cost

In this exercise, you will calculate standard cost.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Common > Standard Costs > Calculation > Calculate Standard Cost.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Top Down Select

From Item [XX]-S130

(second segment)

To Item [XX]-S130
(second segment)

Include Standard Select

Subassemblies

147 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Field / check box Value

Actualize Standard Cost Select

and Revalue Inventory

Click the Calculate button. The Select Device session opens.

Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Error and Warning Report opens.
Review the Error and Warning Report.

Notice that the message in the report states that the standard cost of items [XX]-
S130-OUT and [XX]-S130-IN have zero cost.
This is only a warning message because items OUT and IN are subassembly items
and are intentionally set up to have zero cost.

Click the Close (X) button to close the Error and Warning Report. The Calculate Standard
Cost dialog box opens with the message: “Process ready.”
Click the OK button.
Click the Close button to close the Calculate Standard Cost session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

148 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Exercise 6.10: Validate subcontracting settings
In this exercise, you will validate the subcontracting settings defined for the operations of the
routing for item [XX]-S130.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Item - Routings. The Item – Routings
session opens.
Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S130. The Routing Operations session opens.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Validate Subcontracting Settings menu item. The Validate Subcontracting
Settings of Routing Operations session opens.
Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the From Manufactured Item field.
Press Tab. [XX]-S130 is automatically populated in the second segment of the To
Manufactured Item field.
Click the Validate button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Validate Subcontracting Settings report opens.
Review the Validate Subcontracting Settings report. The following message is displayed in
the report: “No errors found for subcontracting operations of routing 100 of item [XX]-S130.”
Click the Close (X) button to close the Validate Subcontracting Settings report. The Validate
Subcontracting Settings of Routing Operations session displays. The message “Process
completed” displays in the lower-left corner of the session.
Click the Close button to close the Validate Subcontracting Settings of Routing Operations
session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Routings session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

149 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

150 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Production process with subcontracting
In our scenario, after creating a production order for the subcontracted item, then printing the order
documents and releasing the order, you will report the subcontracted operation complete, then post the
subassembly to inventory. Then you will generate the purchase orders for the operations performed in
subcontract work centers and approve the subcontracting purchase order.

Create production order

You can create a production order manually in Job Shop Control, or create a planned production order in
Enterprise Planning, and transfer it to Job Shop Control.
For planned production orders in Enterprise Planning, you can view the production order operations in the
Capacity Use by Planned Order (cprrp2100m000) session. If applicable, information about subassemblies
is indicated on the operation line.

Print production order documents and release production order

When printing production order documents for subcontracting, an additional document is printed, the
subcontracting note. The subcontracting note is an external order document that specifies a
subcontracted operation and the corresponding data, such as the subcontractor, tasks, routing, and
required materials.
In the Production Order (tisfc0101m100) session, on the Estimated Materials (ticst0101m000) tab, click
Show Subassembly to view the subassemblies included in the estimated materials:
• For the subassembly that is sent to the subcontractor, a negative quantity is displayed for the
operation that precedes the subcontracting operation. A positive quantity is displayed for the
subcontracted operation.
• For the subassembly that is received back from the subcontractor, a negative quantity is
displayed for the subcontracted operation. A positive quantity is displayed for the operation that
follows the subcontracted operation.
• If the subassembly that is received back from the subcontractor is the end item, it will be received
in a warehouse specified on the purchase order for this item. Material lines without warehouse
orders are generated for the warehouse to denote the subassembly was physically received while
administratively the end item is registered on the purchase order.

Report operations completed

In the Report Operations Completed (tisfc0130m000) session, complete the operations preceding the
subcontracted operations. If you defined a shop floor warehouse, the subassembly is automatically
received in the shop floor warehouse. Without a shop floor warehouse, the subassembly is received in
the warehouse defined in the Item - Ordering (tcibd2100m000) session.
In the Material to Issue for Production Orders (ticst0101m100) session, you can check whether the
subassembly is issued. In the Inventory by Specification (whwmd2519m000) session, you can check in
which warehouse the subassembly is received.

Generate and approve subcontracting purchase order

A subcontracting purchase order is required to administrate the subcontracting process.

151 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Generate subcontracting purchase order
The following is a high-level overview of how to generate a subcontracting purchase order:

How to generate a subcontracting purchase order

Step 1 From the Production Orders (tisfc0501m000) session, start the

Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents (tisfc2250m000)
session to generate a purchase order.
If the Previous Operation Must be Completed check box in this
session is selected, you must first complete the operations that
precede the subcontracted operation before you can generate a
purchase order.

Step 2 In the Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents

(tisfc2250m000) session, enter a purchase order type.
• The activities linked to the purchase order type determine the
handling of the subcontracting purchase order.
• For example, you can choose to insert the Generate Supply
Orders for Subcontracting (tdpur4216m000) session, and select
the Automatic check box, so that supply orders are
automatically generated.

Step 3 View the generated purchase order in the Purchase Order

(tdpur4100m900) session.
The order line displays the subassembly that you will receive from
the subcontractor after subcontracting.

View supply lines and supply orders

After a subcontracting purchase order is generated, you can view the supply lines in the Purchase Order
(tdpur4100m900) session or the Purchase Order Material Supply Lines (tdpur4116m000) session. Supply
lines represent the materials and subassembly that must be shipped to the subcontractor.
Supply orders are used to ship the subassembly and material from their warehouses at the
manufacturer's location to the administrative warehouse. If supply orders are not created automatically,
run the Generate Supply Orders for Subcontracting (tdpur4216m000) session. Note that the
subassembly's supply system, defined in the Item Data by Warehouse (whwmd2510m000) session, must
be Order Controlled/Single.

Approve subcontracting purchase order

In the Purchase Order (tdpur4100m900) session, click Approve to approve the subcontracting purchase
order.

Issue subcontracting material

This process is usually done automatically in subcontracting, but we will do this manually in order to
check the item transaction.

152 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Receive purchase order
After subcontracting, the subcontractor sends back the subassemblies. To receive the subassemblies into
the subassembly warehouse, you must handle the purchase order. Note that the name of the
subassembly sent back by the subcontractor differs from the name of the subassembly you sent to the
subcontractor.
Complete the following steps:
• In the Purchase Order (tdpur4100m900) session, select the purchase order line of the
subassembly sent back by the subcontractor, and on the appropriate menu, click Purchase Order
Line Status.
• From the Purchase Order Line Status (tdpur4534m000) session, handle the purchase order
according to the defined purchase order procedure. For more information about purchase order
handling, refer to Flexible purchase order processing and Overview of purchase order handling.
When the purchase order is received, Infor LN automatically reports the subcontracted operations as
completed. If applicable, the subassembly and the material that you sent with the subassembly are
backflushed.

Report operations complete

After subcontracted operations are completed by receiving the item, the operations related to
subcontracting will be completed automatically.
Then you can process the remaining operations and report them as completed in the Report Operations
Completed (tisfc0130m000) session. You can then post the end items immediately to inventory.

Exercise 6.11: Create production order, print documents and release

order, and post subassembly to inventory
In this exercise, you will create a production order, print order documents and release the
order, then post the subassembly to inventory.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations 6 because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a production order

1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders.
2. Click the New button. The Production Order session opens.
3. Type [XX]-S130 in the second segment of the Item field.
4. Type 10 in the Quantity Ordered field.

153 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 5. Press Tab five times.
6. Verify Forward displays in the Planning Method drop-down list.
7. Press Tab three times. [Today’s date] is automatically populated in the Production Start field,
and the Requested Delivery and the Planned Delivery fields are also automatically populated.
8. Click the Save button. The Operations tab list view is automatically populated with planned
operations, and [your production order number] is generated in the Production Order field.
9. Write down your production order number: _______________________.
10. Click the Materials tab. The list view has been automatically populated with three operations, one
for each item: [XX]-S131, [XX]-S132, and [XX]-S133.

Part 2: Print order documents and release order

1. Click the Print button on the header menu bar. The Print Production Order Documents session
opens.
2. Click the Documents tab.
3. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Order Covering Note
• Order Distribution
• Serial Number List
4. Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
5. Click the Display tab.
6. Type D in the Device field.
7. Click the Continue button. The Order Covering Note report opens.
8. Review the following parts of the Order Covering Note report:
• Routing Sheet
• Operation Note
• Material List
• Subcontracting Note
9. Click the Close (X) button to close the Order Covering Note report. The Print Production
Order Documents session displays.
10. Click the Close button to close the Print Production Order Documents session. The
Production Order session displays. Printed now displays to the right of the Production Order
field.
11. Click the Release Order button on header menu bar. The production order status changes to
Active.

Part 3: Post subassembly to inventory (report operation complete)

1. Click the Operations tab.
2. Click to select the check box for operation 10.
3. Click Actions on the Operations tab menu bar.
4. Click the Report Operations Completed menu item. The Report Operations Completed
session opens.

154 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 5. Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Report Operations Completed detail
session opens.
6. Click the Default button to the right of the first segment of the Completed field in the Reported
Item Quantities section. 10 is automatically populated in both segments of the Completed field.
7. Click the Complete button. The Report Operations Completed dialog box opens with the
message: “Immediately post subassembly to inventory?”
8. Click the Yes button. Completed now displays to the right of the Operation field.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed detail
session. The Report Operations Completed session displays. Completed displays in the
Operation Status column for operation 10, and Ready to Start displays for operation 20.
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed session.
The Production Order session displays.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Part 4: Check warehousing orders

1. Click Warehousing > Orders > Orders. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
2. Click the Personalization menu.
3. Click the Personalize Form menu item. The Warehousing Orders (Personalization) window
opens.
4. Click the Hidden tab in the Columns section.
5. Click to select the Header Status check box in the Field column.
Note: Use the Field filter or scroll down button to locate Header Status.
6. Click the Actions menu in the Columns section.
7. Click the Unhide Selected Objects menu item.
8. Verify that the Header Status column is now displayed in the list view.
9. Click Save changes and exit in the Warehousing Orders (Personalization) window. The
Warehousing Orders (Personalization) dialog box opens with the message: “Personalizations
have been saved. Please restart the session to see the changes.”
10. Click the OK button. The Warehousing Orders session displays.
11. Click the Close (X) button to close the Warehousing Orders session. The Production Orders
session displays.
12. Click Warehousing > Orders > Orders. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
13. Click the Order Origin column filter drop-down arrow.
14. Click the JSC Production list option. The filtered results display.
15. Type [your production order number from Part 1 of this exercise] in the Order column filter field.
16. Press Enter.
17. Verify the Unfinished Orders Only filter option is cleared in the Views menu by performing the
following steps:

155 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 a. Click the Views button on the header menu bar.
b. If a blue check mark displays to the left of the Unfinished Orders Only option, click the
Unfinished Order Only menu option to clear the blue check mark.
c. If no blue check mark displays, it means that the Unfinished Orders Only option is not
enabled.
Review the filtered results in the list view. Three lines display related to your production order.
Note: You may need to scroll up to see all three lines.
• The line that is shipped from the MAIN warehouse to work center [XX]-30 has transaction
type Issue and order type ISS – issue simple (aut), and its header status is Shipped.
• The line that is shipped from work center [XX]-30 to the MAIN warehouse has transaction
type Receipt and order type WH2 – Automated Receipt, and its header status is Put Away.
• The line that is shipped from the MWC10 (Main) work center to the MAIN warehouse also
has transaction type Receipt and order type WH2, but it has header status Planned.
Click the Go to Details button for the line with header status Shipped. The Warehousing
Order session opens.
Review the contents of the Outbound Lines tab list view.
• Two order lines display, one for item [XX]-S131 and one for item [XX]-S132.
• This indicates that the system has made an issue for these items from the main warehouse to
the work center, and it has been shipped.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for the line with header status Put Away. The Warehousing
Order session opens.
Review the contents of the Inbound Lines tab list view. Here you can see that item [XX]-S130-
OUT has been received from the work center to the main warehouse, and it has been put away.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for the line with header status Planned. The Warehousing Order
session opens.
Review the contents of the Inbound Lines tab.
• Here you can see that the main item for this production order, [XX]-S130, is still planned.
• This is because this item will be received in the main warehouse after completion of the
production order.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Orders session. The
Production Orders session displays. Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

156 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.12: Generate and approve subcontracting purchase order

In this exercise, you will generate the purchase orders for the operations performed in
subcontract work centers, then approve the subcontracting purchase order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Generate subcontracting purchase order

1. Verify that the check box for [your production order from the previous exercise] in the
Production Order column is selected.
2. Click Actions > Subcontracting > Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents. The
Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents session opens.
3. Verify the Purchase Order radio button is selected in the Subcontracting Document section.
4. Click the Zoom button in the Order Series field. The First Free Numbers session opens.
5. Click to select the check box for SUB in the Series column.
6. Click the OK button. The Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents session displays.
7. Click the Zoom button in the Order Type field. The Purchase Order Types session opens.
8. Click to select the check box for SCP in the Purchase Order Type column.
9. Click the OK button. The Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents session displays.
10. Click the Generate button. The Select Device session opens.
11. Click the Display tab.
12. Type D in the Device field.
13. Click the Continue button. The Subcontracted Operations report opens.
14. Review the details of the subcontracting purchase order generated from the subcontracted
operations in the Subcontracted Operations report. Notice that the purchase order number has
been automatically generated.
15. Write down your subcontracting purchase order number: ____________________________.
16. Click the Close (X) button close the Subcontracted Operations report. The Generate
Subcontracting Purchase Documents session displays.

157 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 17. Click the Close button to close the Generate Subcontracting Purchase Documents session.
The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Part 2: Approve subcontracting purchase order

1. Verify that the check box for [your production order from the previous exercise] in the
Production Order column is selected.
2. Click Actions > Subcontracting > Purchase Order. The Purchase Order session opens with
[your subcontracting purchase order number] populated in the Order field.
Note: You may need to drag the Order Lines panel down to see the top portion of the session.
3. Click the Approve button on the header menu bar. The Print Purchase Order report opens,
followed by the Purchase Order Material Supply Lines report.
4. Review the material supply lines of the subcontracted purchase order in the Purchase Order
Material Supply Lines report. Notice that a Supply Order number has been generated for items
[XX]-S133 and [XX]-S130-OUT.
5. Write down the supply order number: ____________________________.
6. Click the Close (X) button to close the Purchase Order Material Supply Lines report. The
Print Purchase Order report displays.
7. Review the Print Purchase Order report.
8. Click the Close (X) button to close the Print Purchase Order report. The Purchase Order
session displays. In Process displays in the Status field.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Purchase Order session. . The Production
Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

158 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Exercise 6.13: Issue subcontracting material
In this exercise, you will initiate the outbound procedure for the item [XX]-S133 and [XX]-
S130-OUT and send the items to the subcontractor.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Transfer item [XX]-S133-OUT to subcontractor warehouse

1. Click Warehousing > Orders > Orders. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
2. Click the Order Origin column filter drop-down arrow.
3. Click the Transfer list option. The filtered results display.
4. Type [your supply order number from the previous exercise] in the Order column filter field.
5. Press Enter to filter the results.
6. Click the Go to Details button for order [your supply order number from the previous
exercise]. The Warehousing Order session displays. The order status Open displays to the
right of the Order field in the header.
7. Click the Shipment Lines tab. Two shipments line display, one for item [XX]-S133, and one for
[XX]-S130-OUT.
8. Click to select the check boxes for both shipment lines.
9. Click the Confirm button on the Shipment Lines tab menu bar. The order status next to the
Order field in the header changes to Put Away.
10. Click the Status tab on the Shipment Lines tab. Confirmed now displays in the Status field for
both lines.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.

Part 2: Initiate material

1. Click the Production Orders session tab. The Production Orders session displays.
2. Verify the check box for [your production order number from Exercise 6.12] in the
Production Order column is still selected.
3. Click Actions > Materials > Initiate Inventory Issue. The Initiate Inventory Issue session
opens.
4. Click the Calendar icon in the To Date/Time field.
5. Click the [today’s date + seven days] option. The To Date/Time field is populated.
6. Click the Initiate button. The Select Device session opens.

159 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 7. Click the Display tab.
8. Type D in the Device field.
9. Click the Continue button. The Initiate Inventory Issue session displays. The status message
“Process completed” displays in the lower left of the Initiate Inventory Issue session.
10. Click the Close button to close the Initiate Inventory Issue session. The Production Orders
session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Part 3: Check warehouse orders

Click the Warehousing Orders session tab. The Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Order Origin column filter drop-down arrow.
Click the JSC Production list option.
Type [your production order number from Exercise 6.11] in the Order column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results. Six lines now display related to your production order.
Click the Go to Details button for the first line shipped from warehouse WSUB to the
subcontracting work center [XX]-90. The Warehousing Order session opens.
Review the contents of the list view. Here you can see that we have made a transfer of item
[XX]-S133 from the main warehouse to the subcontracting work center.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for the other line that is shipped from warehouse WSUB to
the subcontracting work center [XX]-90. The Warehousing Order session opens.
Review the contents of the list view. Here you can see that we have made a transfer of item
[XX]-S130-OUT from the main warehouse to the subcontracting work center.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for the line that is shipped from the MAIN warehouse to the
work center [XX]-40. The Warehousing Order session opens.
Review the contents of the list view. Here you can see that we have not yet shipped item [XX]-
S130-IN from the MAIN warehouse to work center [XX]-40.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Warehousing Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

160 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 _________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 6.14: Receive purchase order

In this exercise, you will process the goods and confirm the receipt of item [XX]-S130-IN for
the subcontracted purchase order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders and Warehousing Orders sessions are open.

Exercise steps

Part 1 : Receive item from purchase order

1. Ensure you are in the Warehousing Orders session.
2. Click the Order Origin column filter drop-down arrow.
3. Click the Purchase list item.
4. Verify the Order column filter field is [empty].
5. Type [your subcontracting purchase order number from Exercise 6.12] in the Order column filter
field.
6. Press Enter to filter the results.
7. Click the Go to Details button for [your subcontracting purchase order number from
Exercise 6.12]. The Warehousing Order session opens.
8. Click to select the check box for 10 in the Order Line column.
9. Click References on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar.
10. Click the Status Overview menu item. The Inbound Line Status Overview session opens.
11. Click the Actions menu.
12. Click the Goods Received Notes menu item. The Print Goods Received Note session opens.
13. Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
14. Click the Display tab.
15. Type D in the Device field.
16. Click the Continue button. The Goods Received Note by Order report opens.
17. Review the Goods Received Note by Order report.
18. Click the Close (X) button to close the Goods Received Note by Order report. The Print
Goods Received Note session displays.

161 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 19. Click the Close button. The Inbound Line Status Overview session displays. Yes now displays
in the Finished column for the Print Goods Received Note activity.
20. Click the Actions menu again.
21. Click the Receive menu item. The Warehouse Receipt session opens.
Note: If the Warehouse Receipt dialog box opens with a message about receiving the order line
on a date other than a planned receipt date, Click the OK button.
22. Click to select the check box for [your subcontracting purchase order number] in the Order
column in the Lines tab list view.
23. Click the Confirm button on the Lines tab menu bar. A green check mark now displays in the
Confirmed column for [your subcontracting purchase order number]. Scroll right to view the
check mark.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouse Receipt session. The Inbound
Line Status Overview session displays. Yes now displays in the Finished column for the
Warehouse Receipt and Generate Inbound Advice activities.
25. Click the Actions menu again.
26. Click the Generate Storage List menu item. The Generate Storage List session opens.
27. Click the Generate button. The Select Device session opens.
28. Click the Display tab.
29. Type D in the Device field.
30. Click the Continue button. The Storage List by Location report opens.
31. Review the Storage List by Location report.
32. Click the Close (X) button to close the Storage List by Location report. The Generate Storage
List session displays.
33. Click the Close button to close the Generate Storage List session. The Inbound Line Status
Overview session displays. Yes now displays in the Finished column for the Generate Storage
List activity.
34. Click the Actions menu again.
35. Click the Storage List menu item. The Storage List session opens.
36. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S130-IN in the Item column.
37. Click the Put Away Run button. The line no longer displays in the list view.
38. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Storage List session. The Inbound Line
Status Overview session displays. Yes now displays in the Finished column for the Storage
List activity.
39. Click the Close (X) button to close the Inbound Line Status Overview session. The
Warehousing Order session displays.
40. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session. The
Warehousing Orders session displays.
41. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Orders session. The
Production Orders session displays.

162 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Part 2: Check subcontracted operation status
1. Click the Go to Details button for production order [your production order]. The Production
Order session opens.
2. Review the operation status for operation 20. Completed now displays in the Operation Status
column for operation 20.
3. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Order session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

163 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

 Exercise 6.15: Report operation complete, report order complete, and
close order
In this exercise, you will report the operation complete, report the production order as
complete, then close the production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Issue item [XX]-S130-IN

Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
selected.
Click Actions > Materials > Material to Issue for Production Orders. The Material to Issue
for Production Orders session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-S130-IN in the Item column and 0 in the Actual Quantity
column, and 10 in the To Issue by Warehouse column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the first Process Material Shortages menu item.

Review the contents of the Actual Quantity and To Issue by Warehouse fields for the selected
line. 10 now displays in Actual Quantity and 0 in To Issue By Warehouse.
Click Save changes and exit to close the Material to Issue for Production Orders session.
The Production Orders session displays.

164 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Part 2: Report operation 30 complete
Click the Go to Details button for [your production order number] in the Production Order
column. The Production Order session opens with the Operations tab displayed by default.
Click to select the check box for 30 in the Operation column.
Click Actions on the Operations tab menu bar.
Click the Report Operations Completed menu item. The Report Operations Completed
session opens.
Click the Go to Details button for operation 30. The Report Operations Completed detail
session opens.
Click the Default button to the right of the first segment of the Completed field in the Reported
Item Quantities section. 10 is automatically populated in both segments of the Completed field.
Click the Complete button. The Report Operations Completed dialog box opens with the
message: “Immediately post main item to inventory?”
Click the Yes button. The Report Operations Completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
Click the Yes button. Completed now displays to the right of the Operation field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed detail
session. The Report Operations Completed session displays. Completed now displays in the
Operation Status column for all three operations
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed session.
The Production Order session displays. Completed displays in the Operation Status column
for all three operations.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close Production Order session. The Production
Orders session displays.

Part 3: Report order completed

Verify the check box for [your production order] in the Production Order column is still
selected.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Orders Completed menu item. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
Click the Completed list item.
Click the Save button. The Report Orders completed dialog box opens with the message: “No
hours posted! Continue?”
Click the Yes button.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays. Completed now displays in the Order Status column for
[your production order number].
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

165 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Part 4: Check warehouse orders
Click Warehousing > Orders > Orders. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
Click the Order Origin column filter drop-down arrow.
Click the JSC Production list item. The filtered results display.
Type [your production order number] in the Order column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results. Six lines display, each with [your production order number]
populated in the Order column.
Review the value in the Header Status column for these six lines. The status is either Shipped
or Put Away for all lines. Scroll right to view this column, if necessary.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Orders session. The
Production Orders session displays.

Part 5: Close order

Verify the check box for [your production order] is still selected in the Production Order
column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Close Orders menu item. The Close Production Orders session opens.
Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Close Production Orders (Process Report) report opens,
followed by the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report.
Review the contents of the Close Production Orders (Process Report). It contains the
message: “Order has been processed successfully.”
Click the Close (X) button to close the Close Production Orders (Process Report). The
Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report displays.
Review the contents of the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions)
report. The Production Orders session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status
column for your production order.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session

166 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Check your understanding

Describe the types of master data that must be configured to use subcontracting.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Describe the subcontracting process with material support in Infor LN.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

167 Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Lesson 7: Production using order
groups
Estimated time
2 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to use order groups in production. In this
lesson, you will:
• Describe the purpose of order groups in Enterprise Planning.
• Explain how to process order groups in Enterprise Planning.
• Describe the purpose of order groups in the JSC module.
• Explain how to process order groups in the JSC module.

Topics
• Overview
• Enterprise Planning order groups
• Production process using JSC order groups

168 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Overview
Order groups are used to limit the handling of individual orders. Packages are created that contain
multiple orders that can be handled as one large order. Planned orders can be grouped when they share
a characteristic.

Enterprise Planning order groups

An Enterprise Planning (EP) order group is a collection of planned production orders in EP that enable
you to process planned production orders more efficiently. After creating an EP order group, you can
collectively confirm the planned orders in that EP order group or transfer the planned orders to JSC.
If you transfer the planned orders of an EP order group, you can indicate that Manufacturing must create
order groups for JSC based on the EP order group. Then you can use the JSC order groups to
collectively perform actions in JSC, such as release production orders or generate outbound advice for
materials.
You can create EP order groups based on different criteria, such as:
• Order status
• Start date or finish date
• Routing group
• Warehouse
• Work center, task, or machine
• Required tools
• Main item or range of item codes or item characteristics
• Used materials

JSC order groups

A JSC order group (also called a production order group) is a group of production orders, defined by the
user. You can add production orders individually, or specify criteria to ensure the orders with common
features are grouped. You can create order groups in JSC, or you can create them earlier in the process
in Enterprise Planning.

Advantages of JSC order groups

Once a JSC order group is formed, you can use it to carry out actions on all the production orders within
the group at the same time, making order processing more efficient; for example:
• Printing order documents
• Releasing orders
• Processing outbound advice
• Recording operation and order statuses
• Reporting orders as completed
• Closing orders
Grouping your production orders together in a JSC order group gives greater efficiency in data handling in
Infor LN. For example, you would only need to perform one action to report a whole group of production
orders complete.
Organizing your production using JSC order groups can also help you to improve your manufacturing
efficiency in the job shop. For example:

169 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 • You can increase material utilization, or decrease tool changeover times.
• If all orders using the same tooling are grouped, you have to change tools less often.
• You can also see the physical location where a task is carried out for all the production orders in
a group.
Your administration can also be more efficient: all material requirements can be printed on one combined
report for the entire order group.

Production using order groups process flow

The overall process flow for production using order groups depends on whether the JSC order group
used in production was transferred from Enterprise Planning or created in the JSC module. If an EP order
group was transferred to JSC, then the process flows from Production Orders to Print Production Order
Documents using the JSC order group number. If the order group needs to be created in JSC, then the
process flows from Production Orders to Create Production Order Group.
The overall process flow involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Production with order groups overall process flow

170 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Scenario: Production using order groups
As part of our business case, in this lesson you will produce Cell Electronics’ latest series of
smartphones, the G700 Astra, the G750 Vox, and the G755 Prima.
To do this, you will:
• Create the items in the system
• Create planned production orders for the items
• Group the planned production orders into an order group (Smartphone SX) in EP
• Transfer the planned orders to create a JSC order group
• Process the production orders using the order group tools available in the JSC module
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

171 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Enterprise Planning order groups
In this section you will learn how to create an order group in Enterprise Planning, then transfer it to a JSC
order group. This process includes the following activities:
• Create planned production orders
• Create an order group for the planned production orders
• View planned order group – planned orders
• Confirm order planning
• Transfer order planning
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

EP order group to JSC order group process flow in Infor LN

Create order groups in Enterprise Planning

You can use the Create Order Group for Planned Orders (cppat3250m000) to create an order group for
planned production orders in Enterprise Planning.
The following is a high-level overview of how to create an EP order group:

How to create an EP order group for planned production orders

Step 1 Start the Create Order Group for Planned Orders (cppat3250m000)
session.

Step 2 Enter a series in the Planned Order Group Series field.

172 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 How to create an EP order group for planned production orders

Step 3 If you want to make the order group an automatic-update order

group, select the Automatic Update check box.

Step 4 Use one of the following methods to specify which planned orders
to include:
o Click Spec. Orders and select specific planned orders. Note:
This option is available only if the Automatic Update check box
is cleared.
o Specify the criteria for planned orders that must be included in
the order group, such as the order status.
o In the Maximum Group Size field, specify how many planned
orders the order group can contain.

Step 5 Click Create Group.

Infor LN will then collect the planned orders that meet the specified
criteria and display these planned orders in the Assign Production
Orders to Planned Order Group (cppat3151s000) session.
In this session you can:
o Specify which of the selected planned orders must be included
in the new order group.
o Confirm the selection by selecting, on the appropriate menu,
the Assign Selected Orders to Group option.

Once an EP group is created, you can manually:

• Add planned orders to it.
• Remove planned orders from it.

Only planned production orders that belong to the actual scenario can be part of an EP order
group.
A planned order can belong only to a single EP order group; it cannot be added to another
order group, even if it meets the criteria for inclusion.

View planned order group details

You can use the Planned Order Group - Planned Orders (cppat1500m100) session to display the details
of planned orders of a specific planned-order group. The tabs available in this session are described in
the following table:

173 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Tab Description

Planned Orders This tab displays general information for each of the planned
orders, such as:
• The ordered item
• The total order quantity
• The planned start and finish date of the order
• The order status

Item - Routing This tab displays the details of the first task of the routing.

Items This tab displays details about the ordered item, such as:
• The item group
• The shop floor planner
• The product line
• The product class
• The selection code

The menu in this session contains several options, as described in the following table:

Menu option Description

Planned Order Groups Select this option to start the Planned Order Groups
(cppat3150m000) session.

Add Order to Planned Select this option to start the Add Order to EP Group
Order Group (cprrp1100s100) session, in which you can enter the planned
order that Infor LN must add to the planned order group.

Planned Orders Select this option to start the Planned Orders (cprrp1100m000)
overview session.

Confirm planned orders

The Confirm Order Planning (cprrp1200m000) session is used to confirm planned orders.
To confirm planned or firm planned orders for an entire order group, after selecting the orders and clicking
Confirm, you must select the EP Order Group check box. Then, in the Planned Order Group section of
the EP Order Group tab, you can specify the order group (or a range of order groups) that you created in
the Create Order Group for Planned Orders (cppat3250m000) session.
After confirming, planned orders with the Planned or Firm Planned order status change to order status
Confirmed. Confirmed planned orders can then be transferred to the execution level of Infor LN.

174 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Transfer planned orders
You can use the order-grouping functionality in Enterprise Planning to transfer a whole order group at
once, and (optionally) translate it to a JSC order group. In this course, you will translate an EP order
group into a JSC order group.

Scenario: Create EP order group and transfer to JSC order group

As part of our business case, you will create the new smartphone items in the system (G700,
G750, and G755), then create planned production orders for the items. Then you will create
an EP order group (Smartphone SX) to group the planned production orders you created.
Lastly, you will confirm and transfer the planned orders to create a JSC order group.
In this scenario you will perform the following activities:

Demo 7.1: Update parameters for order grouping

This demonstration shows how to create a number group.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this demonstration.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• To prepare the system for future exercises, this demo must be completed.

Demo steps

If you are taking this course as instructor-led training, the instructor will complete this demo.

175 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 1. Click Manufacturing > Parameters > Production Orders. The Production Order Parameters
session opens.
2. Click the Go to Details button for the Actual set line (without Effective date). The Production
Order Parameters detail session opens.
3. Click the Zoom button in the Number Group for Planned Order Groups field. The Number
Groups session opens.
4. Click to select the check box for 131 in the Number Group column.
5. Click the OK button. The Production Order Parameters detail session displays.
6. Click the Zoom button in the Production Order Series for Planned Order Groups field. The
First Free Numbers session opens.
7. Click to select the check box for PGNM in the Series column.
8. Click the OK button. The Production Order Parameters detail session displays.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Parameters detail
session.
10. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Parameters session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.2: Create new items

In this exercise, you will create items [XX]-G700, [XX]-G750 and [XX]-G755 by copying from
an existing item.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Copy item [XX]-S100 to make new item [XX]-G700

1. Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
2. Type [XX]-S in the second segment of the Item filter field.

176 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 3. Press Enter to filter the results.
4. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
5. Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
6. Verify [XX]-S100 is populated in the second segment of the Item field in the Source section.
7. Type [XX]-G700 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
8. Type Smartphone Astra in the Description field.
9. Verify or click to select the following information from the table below:

Check box Value

Bill of Material Selected

Routing Selected

Supplying Relationships Selected

Item Text Not selected

Business Partners by Item Not selected

Calculate Standard Cost Selected

and Valuation Price

10. Click the Copy button. The status message “Successfully copied item [XX]-S100” displays in the
lower-left section of the Copy Item Data Session.

Part 2: Copy item [XX]-S100 to create new item [XX]-G750

1. Verify [XX]-S100 is still populated in the second segment of the Item field in the Source section.
2. Type [XX]-G750 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
3. Type Smartphone Vox in the Description field.
4. Repeat steps 9-10 from Part 1.

Part 3: Copy item [XX]-S100 to create new item [XX]-G755

1. Verify [XX]-S100 is still populated in the second segment of the Item field in the Source section.
2. Type [XX]-G755 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
3. Type Smartphone Prima in the Description field.
4. Repeat steps 9-10 from Part 1.
5. Click the Close button to close the Copy Item Data session. The Items session displays.
6. Type [XX]-G in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
7. Press Enter to filter the results. Your created items display in the list view.

177 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 8. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.3: Create planned production orders

In this exercise, you will create planned production orders for the items in a selected
scenario.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Planning > Order Planning > Planned Orders.
Click the New View button.
Click the Zoom button in the Scenario field. The Scenarios session opens.
Click to select the check box for ACT in the Scenario column.
Click the OK button. The Planned Orders session displays.
Click the New button. The Planned Order session opens.
Type [XX]-G700 in the third segment of the Plan Item field.
Type 10 in the Quantity field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order session. The Planned
Orders session displays.
Click the New button. The Planned Order session opens.
Type [XX]-G750 in the third segment of the Plan Item field.
Type 10 in the Quantity field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order session. The Planned
Orders session displays.
Click the New button. The Planned Order session opens.
Type [XX]-G755 in the third segment of the Plan Item field.

178 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Type 10 in the Quantity field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order session. The Planned
Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Planned Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.4: Create order group for planned production orders

In this exercise, you will create an order group for the planned production orders, then view
the planned orders linked to the planned order group.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Planned Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create order group

Type [XX]-G in the third segment of the Order Item filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for order item [XX]-G700. The Planned Order session opens.
Click the Details tab.
Click the Zoom button in the Planner field. The Employees – General session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-40 in the Employee column.
Click the OK button. The Planned Order session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order session. The Planned
Orders session displays.
Click to Go to Details button for order item [XX]-G750. The Planned Order session opens.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 for order item [XX]-G750.

179 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Click the Go to Details button for order item [XX]-G755.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 for order item [XX]-G755.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Orders session.
Click Planning > Plan Transfer > Planned Order Groups. The Planned Order Groups
session opens.
Click the New button. The Create Order Group for Planned Orders session opens.
Verify PGNM is populated in the Planned Order Group Series field.
Type Smartphone SX in the Group Description field.
Click the Options tab.
Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Planner field. The Employees – General
session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-40 in the Employee column.
Click the OK button. The Create Order Group for Planned Orders session displays.
Press Tab. [XX]-40 is automatically populated in the second segment of the Planner field.
Click the Create Group button. The Assign Production Orders to Planned Order Group
session opens.
Click to select the check boxes in the Selected column for each of the following values in the
Item column:
• [XX]-G700
• [XX]-G750
• [XX]-G755

It is very important that you select the check boxes in the Selected column, NOT
the check boxes in the regular check box column.

Click the Actions menu.

Click the Assign Selected Orders to Group menu item. The Create Order Group for Planned
Orders dialog box opens with the message: “Created Planned Order Group nnnnnnnnn.”
Click the OK button.
Click the Close button to close the Create Order Group for Planned Orders session. The
Planned Order Groups session displays.
Type [your user ID] in the Group Creator column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results. [Your planned order group number] displays in the Planned
Order Group column.
Write down your planned order group number: ____________________________.

Part 2: View planned order group – planned orders

Click to select the check box for [your planned order group number] in the Planned Order
Group column.
Click the References menu.

180 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Click the Planned Order Group - Planned Orders menu item. The Planned Order Group -
Planned Orders session opens.
Verify the Planned Orders tab is selected.
Review the data for the planned orders in the Planned Orders tab.
Click the Item Routing tab.
Review the data for the planned orders in the Item Routing tab.
Click the Items tab.
Review the data for the planned orders in the Items tab.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order Group - Planned Orders
session.
Click Save changes and exit button to close the Planned Order Groups session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.5: Confirm and transfer planned orders

In this exercise, you will use the planned order group to confirm the planned production
orders and then transfer the planned orders to production to create a JSC order group.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Confirm planned orders

1. Click Planning > Order Planning > Confirm Order Planning. The Confirm Order Planning
session opens.
2. Click to clear the Planned Orders check box.
3. Click to select the EP Order Groups check box.
4. Click the EP Order Groups tab.
5. Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Planned Order Group field. The Planned
Order Groups session opens.

181 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 6. Type [your user ID] in the Group Creator column filter field.
7. Press Enter to filter the results.
8. Click to select the check box for [your planned order group number] in the Planned Order
Group column.
9. Click the OK button. The Confirm Order Planning session displays.
10. Press Tab. ZZZZZZZZZ is automatically populated in the second segment of the Planned Order
Group field.
11. Click the Zoom button in the second segment of the Planned Order Group field. The Planned
Order Groups session opens.
12. Type [your user ID] in the Group Creator column filter field.
13. Press Enter to filter the results.
14. Click to select the check box for [your planned order group number] in the Planned Order
Group column.
15. Click the OK button. The Confirm Order Planning session displays.
16. Click the Confirm button. The Confirm Order Planning dialog box opens with the message: “3
order(s) confirmed successfully.”
17. Click the OK button.
18. Click the Close button to close the Confirm Order Planning session.

Part 2: Transfer planned orders

1. Click Planning > Plan Transfer > Transfer Order Planning. The Transfer Order Planning
session opens.
2. Click to select the Planned Order Group check box.
3. Click the Production tab.
4. Click the Zoom button in the Planned Order Group From field. The Planned Order Group
session opens.
5. Type [your user ID] in the Group Creator column filter field.
6. Press Enter to filter the results.
7. Click to select the check box for [your planned order group number].
8. Click the OK button. The Transfer Order Planning session displays.
9. Press Tab. [Your planned order group number] is automatically populated in the second
segment of the Planned Order Group field.
10. Click to select the Create Order Group check box.
11. Click the Zoom button in the Production Order Group Series field. The First Free Numbers
session opens.
12. Click to select PGN in the Series column.
13. Click the OK button. The Transfer Order Planning session displays.
14. Click the Zoom button in the Production Order Series field. The Default Production Order
Data session opens.

182 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 15. Click to select PRO in the Production Order Series column.
16. Click the OK button. The Transfer Order Planning session displays
17. Click the Transfer button. The Select Device session opens.
18. Click the Display tab.
19. Type D in the Device field.
20. Click the Continue button. The Transferred Order Groups report opens.
21. Review the contents of the Transferred Order Groups report.
• Notice that your three planned orders from your planned order group have been transferred
to production orders.
• Each of your production orders now belong to a new production order group.

22. Write down the three production order numbers:

___________________ _______________________ ___________________

23. Write down the production order group number: ______________________.

24. Click the Close (X) button to close the Transferred Order Groups report.
25. Click the Close button to close the Transfer Order Planning session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

183 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Production process using JSC order groups
JSC order groups can be created by transferring orders from Enterprise Planning using the Transfer
Order Planning session, but they can also be created directly in the JSC module using the Create
Production Order Group (tisfc3250m000) session.
The following is a high-level overview of how to create a JSC order group:

How to create a JSC order group in the JSC module

Step 1 Make an initial selection of production orders in the Create

Production Order Group session.

Step 2 Accept or reject individual orders as part of an order group in the

Assign Orders to Production Order Group (tisfc3151s000) session
(started from the Create Production Order Group session).

In this course, you will process production orders using a JSC order group that was transferred from
Enterprise Planning. This process involves the following activities:
• Print order documents and release production orders
• Report operations completed by order group
• Report orders completed globally
• Receive final products and close production orders
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Production process using JSC order groups process flow in Infor LN

184 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

View production order groups
You can use the Production Order Group - Production Orders (tisfc0501m100) session to display the
contents of a JSC order group. In addition, you can use the options in the Specific menu to release
production orders, report production as completed, backflush material and hours, and close production
orders. You can also add or remove production orders from an order group.

A production order that is assigned to a group cannot be processed individually. This will only
be possible if you remove the order from the group.

Report operations completed by order group

Use the Report Operations Complete by Order Group (tisfc0205m000) session to report complete all the
current operations for the production orders in an JSC order group.
For each order, the current operation/operation in process is shown. If you are unable to report all the
operations complete (for example, some are blocked), you will have to remove their production orders
from the JSC order group and deal with them individually. In this case, you would use the Production
Orders (tisfc0501m000) session to remove the orders.

Report orders completed globally

You can use the Report Orders Completed Globally (tisfc0206m000) session to report multiple production
orders as complete at the same time. This can be a range of production orders or a JSC order group. The
quantities reported as complete in the last operation are posted (direct process inbound) to inventory if
the quantities are not yet posted.
Note: If the Backflushing Method field is set to Interactive in the Production Order Parameters
(tisfc0100s000) session, when clicking Report Complete, you are asked if you want to backflush
materials/hours immediately. In this setup, this question is displayed even if backflushing is not applicable
for the selected order(s).

Close production orders

You can use the Close Production Orders (ticst0201m000) session to close production orders by
production group by selecting the By Group radio button, then using the Production Order Group fields in
the Grouping Selection section to specify the production order group that contains the production orders
that must be closed.

185 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Scenario: Complete production using JSC order groups
As part of our business case, you will complete the production process for the G700, G750,
and G755 smartphones in the JSC order group you created.
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

Exercise 7.6: Print and release production orders

In this exercise, you will print the documents of the production orders linked to the production
order group and release the orders.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders. The Production Orders session
opens.
2. Type PRO in the Production Order column filter field.
3. Type [XX]-G in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
4. Press Enter to filter the results.
5. Click the Go to Details button for [your first production order number] related to item [XX]-
G700. The Production Order session opens.

186 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 6. Review the contents of the Operations tab list view.
7. Click the Materials tab.
8. Review the contents of the Materials tab list view.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
10. Repeat steps 5-9 for [your two production order numbers] related to items [XX]-G750 and
[XX]-G755.
11. Click to select the check boxes for [your three production order numbers] in the Production
Order column and items [XX]-G700, [XX]-G750, and [XX]-G755 in the Item column.
12. Click the Actions menu.
13. Click the Print Documents and Release Order menu item. The Print Production Order
Documents session opens.
14. Click the Documents tab.
15. Click to clear the following check boxes:
• Order Covering Note
• Subcontracting Note
• Order Distribution
• Serial Number List
16. Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
17. Click the Display tab.
18. Type D in the Device field.
19. Click the Continue button. A Print Production Order Documents window opens, with the
message: “No data found for selection; hence no action taken”.
20. Click the OK button. The Released Production Orders report opens.
21. Review the contents of the Released Production Orders report.
22. Click the Close (X) button to close the Released Production Orders report. The Production
Orders session displays.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

187 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 _________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.7: Report operations completed

In this exercise, you will report the operations of the production orders linked to the order
group, as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Control > Miscellaneous > Report Operations
Complete by Order Group. The Report Operations Complete by Order Group session opens.
2. Click the Search button. The Report Operations Complete by Order Group – Search window
opens.
3. Type [your production order group number from Exercise 7.5] in the Production Order Group
field.
4. Click the OK button. The Report Operations Complete by Order Group session displays.
5. Review the values in the Current Operation column for [your three production order
numbers]. 10 displays in the Current Operation column for all three orders.
6. Click to select the check boxes for [your three production order numbers] in the Production
Order column.
7. Click the Actions menu.
8. Click the Report Complete menu item. The Select Device session opens.
9. Click the Display tab.
10. Type D in the Device field.
11. Click the Continue button. The Report Operations Complete by Order Group session
displays.
12. Review the values in the Current Operation column for [your three production orders]. 20 now
displays in for all three orders.
13. Repeat steps 6-10 for operation 20.
14. Review the values in the Operation Status column for [your three production orders].
Completed now displays for all three orders.
15. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Complete by Order
Group session. The Production Orders session displays.

188 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

Exercise 7.8: Report orders completed globally

In this exercise, you will report the production orders linked to the production order group, as
completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demos because they provide data
or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Control > Miscellaneous > Report Orders
Completed Globally. The Report Orders Completed Globally session opens.
Click the By Group radio button.
Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Order Group field. The Production Order
Groups session opens.
Click to select the check box for [your production order group number] in the Order Group
column.
Click the OK button. The Report Orders Completed Globally session displays.
Press Tab. [Your production order group number] is automatically populated in the second
segment of the Order Group field.
Click the Report Complete button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Report Production Orders Completed report opens.
Review the contents of the Report Production Orders Completed report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Report Production Orders Completed report. The
Report Orders Completed Globally session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Report Orders Completed Globally session. The
Production Orders session displays. Completed now displays in the Order Status column for
each of [your three production order numbers].
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

189 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 7.9: Close production orders

In this exercise, you will close the production orders of the production order group.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demos because they provide data
or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Costing > Close Production Orders.
Click the By Group radio button.
Click the Zoom button in the first segment of the Order Group field.
Click to select the check box for [your production order group] in the Order Group column.
Click the OK button. The Close Production Orders session displays.
Press Tab. [Your production order group] is automatically populated in the second segment
of the Order Group field.
Click the Options tab.
Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Close Production Orders (Process Report) report opens,
followed by the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report. Each production
order includes the message “Order has been processed successfully”.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report. The
Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report opens.
Review the contents of the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions)
report. The Close Production Orders session displays.

190 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 Click the Close button to close the Close Production Orders session. The Production Orders
session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status column for [your three production
order numbers]. Note: Scroll to the right, if necessary, to view the order status.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

191 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Check your understanding

What is the purpose of order groups in Enterprise Planning?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

The steps for how to create an order group in Enterprise Planning appear below in the wrong
order. Reorder the steps from 1-3 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create an order group for planned production orders

Create planned production orders

Assign planned orders to order group

What is the purpose of JSC order groups?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

192 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

 The steps for how to process JSC order groups in production appear below in the wrong
order. Reorder the steps from 1-4 to reflect the correct sequence.

Print order documents and release production orders

Report operations completed by order group

Close production orders

Report orders completed globally

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

193 Lesson 7: Production using order groups

Lesson 8: Unit effectivity
Estimated time
2 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to use effectivity units in production. In this
lesson, you will:
• Explain how to maintain items with unit effectivity.
• Explain how to maintain effectivity units.
• Explain how to maintain requirements.
• Explain how to add exceptions to BOMs and routings.
• Explain how to process orders with different effectivity units.

Topics
• Overview
• Set up unit effectivity
• Logistics process using unit effectivity

194 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Overview
An effectivity unit is a reference number, for example a sales order line or a project deliverable line, that is
used to model deviations for a unit effective item.
Unit effectivity is a method to control the validity of variations on an end item. You can use unit effectivity
for pegging purposes, or to model exceptions from a standard end item so that you can make variations
without having to define separate item codes. As a result, you do not need to maintain separate BOMs for
every combination of variations. End items can be, for example, airplanes or touring cars.
The deviations consist of relatively small variations of the end item. For example, fitting red seats instead
of blue ones, or a special type of radar or air conditioning, in an otherwise standard type of airplane.
You can use unit effectivity to apply changes if:
• Few changes are made.
• The changes apply to relatively small subsets of the end item.
• The changes result from customer requests, engineering, or production.

Concepts in unit effectivity

In unit effectivity, a number of concepts can be distinguished, as described in the following table:

Concept Description

Effectivity unit • An effectivity unit is a code that is linked to an end item for
identification, and which can represent the deviation(s) from the
standard end item.
• You can link an effectivity unit to manufactured items and purchased
items.

Requirement • A requirement in unit effectivity is a business reason that you define

to describe the modifications and the variations for an item (aka the
exceptions).
• Requirements can indicate, for example, regulations:
o USA: USA regulations
o EUR: European regulations
o ASIA: Asian regulations
• Requirements can also, for example, concern an item’s model:
o LIGHT: Model with limited features
o NORMAL: Model with the normal features
o ADVANCED: Model with advanced features

Exception • An exception in unit effectivity is the definition of a deviation that

applies to a unit effective item.
• An exception indicates, for example, whether a specific BOM line or a
specific routing operation is used for an effectivity unit.
• Exceptions are often created as a result of customer requirements, or
technology upgrades.

195 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

How to use unit effectivity
To use unit effectivity, you must first define the master data. After that, you can use unit effectivity units to
define exceptions for an item’s series, or series’ subset. You can use this approach in low-volume
production of complex products, for example, in aerospace and defense industries.
Series are defined for a specific end item, for example, for an airplane. Exceptions are then defined, for
example, for numbers 50-100 of an item’s series. This method is the way in which unit effectivity was
used in former releases of Infor LN.

Unit effectivity and production order completion

If sales order lines contain items with an effectivity unit, Enterprise Planning generates production orders
to produce those items.
Together with the production order, an order distribution is generated with a distribution line for every
effectivity unit. On each distribution line, the item quantity for the effectivity unit is specified.

Reporting effectivity units completed

Effectivity units on production orders can be reported completed in the Report Orders Completed
(tisfc0520m000) session. You can report effectivity units separately, or all simultaneously.
To complete all the effectivity units at once for the production order:
• Start the Report Orders Completed (tisfc0120s000) session and click Report all Eff. Units with
Planned Quantities.
• After completion, the ordered quantities of all effectivity units are added together.
• The result is displayed in the Quantity to Deliver field.
To complete effectivity units separately:
• Specify an effectivity unit in the Effectivity Unit field.
• Specify the quantity that you want to report as completed in the Additional Quantity to Deliver
field.
• Save the quantity. The sum of the quantities that you specified for the effectivity units (distribution
lines), is displayed in the Quantity to Deliver field.

Lot control
If the manufactured items are lot controlled, and their production order has an order distribution, a lot
code must be specified for every distribution line in the Production Order Distribution (tisfc0105m000)
session.
If you do not manually specify a lot code in the Production Order Distribution (tisfc0105m000) session, a
lot code can be generated automatically if the Generate Lots for Effectivity Units Automatically check box
is selected in the Inventory Handling Parameters (whinh0100m000) session. The generated lot code
equals the effectivity unit.
Effectivity units with lot codes must always be reported as completed separately.

196 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Set up unit effectivity
The activities required to set up unit effectivity include:
• Create items
• Create items – effectivity series
• Create a requirement
• Maintain BOM and routing
• Calculate standard cost

This process involves the following sessions in Infor LN, as shown in the following diagram:

Unit effectivity setup process flow in Infor LN

The following is a high-level overview of how to specify effectivity units before sales/quotation/contract
order entry:

How to specify effectivity units before sales/quotation/contract order entry

Step 1 Define the master data for unit effectivity.

• Select the Unit Effectivity check box in the Implemented
Software Components (tccom0500m000) detail session.
• Specify business requirement codes and descriptions in the
Requirements (tcuef0106m000) session.
o You use requirements later on by linking them to exceptions
during the design of, for example, a BOM or a routing (series
approach).

197 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 How to specify effectivity units before sales/quotation/contract order entry

o For every requirement you can define an upgrade price, which

is part of the effectivity unit's sales price.
• If desired, you can define default requirements for end items in
the Item - Requirements (tcuef0108m000) session.
o These default requirements can be imported in the
Requirement - Effectivity Units (tcuef0107m000) session if an
effectivity unit is defined for the end item.

Step 2 Define an effectivity series for an item in the Items - Effectivity

Series (tcuef0101m000) session.
To create a range of effectivity units, select the newly defined item –
effectivity series and click Generate Units from the appropriate
menu.

Step 3 Specify the required variations and modifications (exceptions)

for the BOM, routing, routing operations, sourcing strategy,
and/or item – supplier data.
The exceptions can be linked in the Exceptions (tcuef0105m000)
session to a requirement or directly to an effectivity unit.
If you link a requirement to an exception, you must connect the
requirement to a specific effectivity unit in the Requirement -
Effectivity Units (tcuef0107m000) session.
.

Implemented software components

As part of the process to set up master data for unit effectivity, the Unit Effectivity check box must be
selected in the Implemented Software Components (tccom0500m000) detail session.

Items – effectivity series

You can use the Items - Effectivity Series (tcuef0101m000) session to define a unit series code that
identifies a series of effectivity units for a specific item.
• You can define more than one effectivity series for a specific unit effective item; for example, one
effectivity series for every customer who buys the item.
• For every series, you can define one or more sequence ranges in the From Sequence Number
and the To Sequence Number fields; for example:
o You can define range from 1 to 10 for a series, and a second range from 11 to 14.
o If more than one range exists for a series, the ranges will not be allowed to overlap.
After defining a series and a sequence range for a specific unit effective item:
• Select the record, then select Generate Effectivity Units from the Specific menu.
• As a result, Infor LN will link an effectivity unit to the combination of item, effectivity series, and
sequence number.
• The data is then stored in the Effectivity Units session.

198 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Effectivity units
You can use the Effectivity Units (tcuef0502m000) session to display effectivity units. An effectivity unit is
linked to an item for which the Unit Effective End Item check box is selected in the Items session.
If you defined a series for a specific unit effective item in the Items - Effectivity Series session, you can
generate effectivity units in that session. Infor LN now stores the combination of item, effectivity series,
and sequence number as an effectivity unit in the Effectivity Units session.
To define, maintain, and configure effectivity units, you must use the Effectivity Unit (tcuef0102m000)
session. To configure an effectivity unit, take the following actions:
• Define or select an effectivity unit in the session header.
• Start the configuration by selecting the desired requirements on the Requirement tab.
You can use the tabs in the header and list view of the Effectivity Unit session to define and/or maintain
data with respect to the effectivity unit, as described in the following table:

Tab Description

Header tabs

Effectivity Unit On this tab, you can define or maintain an effectivity unit.

Prices On this tab, you can display and (re)calculate the estimated cost of the
effectivity unit.
If you configure an effectivity unit by selecting requirements, the
configuration can result in extra material for the item.
Therefore, the estimated cost for the effectivity unit can deviate
substantially from the item's standard cost.
When you finish configuring the effectivity unit, you can select the
Configuration Ready check box on the Effectivity Unit tab. As a result, the
estimated cost of the effectivity unit is automatically calculated.

Date The effectivity unit takes effect at the date and time entered in the
Effective Date field on the Date tab.
You must first enter an effective date before you can save the effectivity-
unit data.

List view tabs

Requirement This lines on this tab refer to the Requirement - Effectivity Units
(tcuef0107m000) session.

Effectivity Unit – The lines on this tab refer to the Effectivity Unit - Process Variables
Process Variables (tirou1114m000) session.

199 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Requirements
A requirement is the business reason that you define to describe exceptions used in unit effectivity. A
requirement can be, for example, a specific market, model, or customer. You can specify requirement
codes and descriptions in the Requirements (tcuef0106m000) session.

Categories and exclusive indicators

You can also define categories and exclusive indicators for requirements. This enables you to group
requirements so that requirements with identical categories and exclusive indicators belong to the same
group. Only one requirement from a group can be applicable to an item with a specific effectivity unit.
After defining default requirements with identical categories and exclusive indicators in this session, you
can import them to the Requirement - Effectivity Units (tcuef0107m000) session or the Effectivity Unit
(tcuef0102m000) session. However, you cannot save them in those sessions. All requirements that are
selected for a specific effectivity unit must have a unique combination of category and exclusive indicator.

Item – requirements
Use the Item - Requirements (tcuef0108m000) session to define requirements for a specific end item,
sold-to business partner, ship-to country, and/or ship-from warehouse.
You can indicate whether a requirement is a default requirement by selecting the Default check box. You
can choose to import default requirements for a specific effectivity unit in the Requirement - Effectivity
Units (tcuef0107m000) session, or the Effectivity Unit (tcuef0102m000) session by clicking (Re-)Import
Requirements on the appropriate menu.

BOM and routing operations

For manufactured items with effectivity units you can define variations in the bill of material. You can
apply exceptions to define a deviation that applies to a unit effective item. An exception indicates, for
example, whether a specific BOM line or a specific routing operation is used for an effectivity unit. A BOM
line with no defined exception is always included in the configuration.
You can also define variations in the operations of the manufactured items with effectivity units. Similar to
the BOM, this is achieved by using exceptions.

200 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Scenario: Set up item with unit effectivity
As part of our business case, we will produce three variations of the new U800 Tut
smartphone to meet customer demand: one with no charger, one with a normal charger, and
one with a fast charger. The three items will be sold under the same item number, but we will
change the BOM to include the fast charger and normal charger, and we will update the
routing to add operations to include the fast and the normal charger for the two variations of
the item that have those.
In this scenario, you will set up the item in the system with unit effectivity, as shown in the
following diagram:

Demo 8.1: Check parameters

This demonstration shows how to verify unit effectivity is activated, create number unit for
unit effectivity, and review and update effectivity unit parameters.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this demo.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Demo steps

If you are taking this course as instructor-led training, the instructor will complete this demo.

Part 1: Verify unit effectivity is activated

Click Master Data > Enterprise Model > Company Data > Implemented Software
Components. The Implemented Software Components session opens.
Click the Go to Details button for the Actual set line (without introduction date). The
Implemented Software Components detail session opens.

201 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Concepts (Logistics) tab.
Verify the Unit Effectivity check box is selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Implemented Software Components
detail session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Implemented Software Components
session.

Part 2: Create number unit for unit effectivity

Click Master Data > Code Definitions > Logistic Codes > Number Groups.
Click the New button. The Number Groups detail session opens.
Type UEF in the first segment of the Number Group field.
Type Effectivity Unit in the second segment of the Number Group field.
Type 0 in the Series Length field.
Click the Save button.
Click the Go to Details button for number group UEF. The Number Group session opens.
Verify 1 displays in the First Free Number field related to series Series for Number Group
UEF.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Number Group session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Number Groups session.

Part 3: Review and update effectivity unit parameters

Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Unit Effectivity Parameters. The Unit Effectivity
Parameters session opens.
Click the Go to Details button for the Actual set line (without introduction date). The Unit
Effectivity Parameters detail session opens.
Click the Zoom button in the Number Group for Effectivity Unit field. The Number Groups
session opens.
Click to select the check box for UEF in the Number Group column.
Click the OK button. The Unit Effectivity Parameters detail session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Unit Effectivity Parameters detail
session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Unit Effectivity Parameters session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

202 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.2: Copy items
In this exercise, you will copy existing items to create new items, then you will define the unit
effectivity data.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Copy item [XX]-S100 to create new item [XX]-U800

Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-S100 in the Item column.
Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
Type Smartphone Tut in the Description field.
Verify the following check boxes are already selected:
• Bill of Material
• Routing
Click to select the Calculate Standard Cost and Valuation Price check box.
Click the Copy button.
Click the Close button to close the Copy Item Data session. The Items session displays.
Type [XX]-U in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U800. The Items detail session opens.
Click the Details tab.
Click to select the Lot Controlled check box.
Click the General tab.
Click the Sales button in the Subentities section. The Item – Sales session opens.
Click the Price tab.
Type 48 in the Sales Price field.
Press Tab. The Item – Sales dialog box opens with the message: “Note: The default price book
will be updated automatically.”
Click the OK button.

203 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Sales session. The Items detail
session displays.
Click the Warehousing button. The Item - Warehousing session opens.
Click the Identification tab.
Click to select the Lots in Inventory check box.
Note: You may need to pull the Warehouses panel down to see the fields in the top portion of
the session.
Click Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Warehousing session. The Items detail
session displays.
Click the Details tab.
Click to select the following check boxes:
• Unit Effective End Item
• Unit Effective Supply
Click to clear the Units are Interchangeable check box.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.

Part 2: Copy item [XX]-S121 to create new items [XX]-U888 and [XX]-U899
1. Type [XX]-S121 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
2. Press Enter to filter the results.
3. Click to select the check box for [XX]-S121 in the Item column.
4. Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
5. Type [XX]-U888 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
6. Type Normal Charger in the Description field.
7. Click to clear the Item Text check box.
8. Verify the Business Partners by Item check box is selected.
9. Click to select the Calculate Standard Cost and Valuation Price check box.
10. Click the Copy button.
11. Click the Close button to close the Copy Item Data session. The Items session displays.
12. Type [XX]-U888 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
13. Press Enter to filter the results.
14. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U888. The Items detail session opens.
15. Click the Details tab.
16. Click to select the Lot Controlled check box.
17. Click the General tab.
18. Click the Purchase button. The Item – Purchase session opens.
19. Verify 2 displays in the Purchase Price field.

204 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 20. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Purchase session. The Items detail
session displays.
21. Click the Warehousing button. The Item - Warehousing session opens.
22. Click the Identification tab.
23. Click to select the Lots in Inventory check box.
24. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Warehousing session. The Items
detail session displays.
25. Click the Details tab.
26. Verify the following check boxes are selected:
• Unit Effective End Item
• Unit Effective Supply
• Units are Interchangeable
27. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.
28. Click to select the check box for [XX]-U888 in the Item column.
29. Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
30. Type [XX]-U899 in the second segment of the Item field in the Target section.
31. Type Fast Charger in the Description field.
32. Click to clear the Item Text check box.
33. Verify the Business Partners by Item check box is selected.
34. Click to select the Calculate Standard Cost and Valuation Price check box.
35. Click the Copy button.
36. Click the Close button to close the Copy Item Data session. The Items session displays.
37. Type [XX]-U899 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
38. Press Enter to filter the results.
39. Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U899. The Items detail session opens.
40. Click the Details tab.
41. Verify the Lot Controlled check box is selected.
42. Click the General tab.
43. Click the Warehousing button. The Item - Warehousing session opens.
44. Click the Identification tab.
45. Review the value of the Lots in Inventory check box. It is selected.
46. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Warehousing session. The Items
detail session displays.
47. Click the Purchase button. The Item – Purchase session opens.
48. Type 4 in the Purchase Price field.

205 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 49. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Purchase session. The Item –
Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace Latest Purchase Price by Actual
Purchase Price?”
50. Click the Yes button. The Item – Purchase dialog box opens with the message: “Replace
average purchase price by actual purchase price?”
51. Click the Yes button. The Items detail session displays.
52. Click the Details tab.
53. Verify the following check boxes are selected:
• Unit Effective End Item
• Unit Effective Supply
• Units are Interchangeable
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session. The Items session
displays.

Part 3: Cost calculation for Fast charger [XX]-U899

Type [XX]-U in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U899. The Items detail session opens.
Click the Costing button. The Item – Costing session opens.
Click the Calculate button. The values in the Costs session are updated.
Click the OK button. The Items detail session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

Part 4: Create an adjustment order

Click Warehousing > Cycle Counting/Adjustment Orders > Adjustment Orders.
Click the New button. The Adjustment Order session opens.
Click the Zoom button in the Warehouse field. The Warehouses session opens.
Click to select the check box for MAIN in the Warehouse column.
Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Reason for Adjustment field. The Reasons session opens.
Click to select the check box for ADJ001 in the Reason column.
Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
Click the New Line button on the Lines tab menu bar. A new line displays with 10 populated in
the Line column.
Type [XX]-U888 in the second segment of the Item field.
Type 1002 in the Location field.
Click the Zoom button in the Lot field. The Item – Lot session opens.
Click the New button. The Item – Lot detail session opens.

206 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Type [XX]-0000001 in the first segment of the Lot field.
Click the Zoom button in the Business Partner field. The Buy-from Business Partners
session opens.
Click to select the check box for BPG000004 in the Buy-from Business Partner column.
Click the OK button. The Item – Lot detail session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Lot detail session. The Item – Lot
session displays.
Verify the check box for [your lot number] in the Lot column is selected.
Click the OK button. The Adjustment Order session displays.
Type 1000 in the Inventory Adjusted field.
Press Tab. 1000 is automatically populated in the Variance field.
Click the New Line button on the Lines tab menu bar. A new line displays with 20 populated in
the Line column.
Type [XX]-U899 in the second segment of the Item field.
Type 1002 in the Location field.
Repeat steps 12 through 22 to create a second lot number, [XX]-0000002.
Click the Save button.
Click the Process button on the header menu bar. The Adjustment Order dialog box opens
with the message: “End of process.”
Click the OK button. A green check mark now displays in the Processed column for lines 10
and 20. Scroll right to see this column.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Order session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Adjustment Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

207 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.3: Create items – effectivity series
In this exercise, you will define the effectivity series for a unit effective item and generate the
effectivity units. Then you will maintain and configure the effectivity units generated for the
end item.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Master Data > Items - Effectivity Series.
Click the New button. The Items - Effectivity Series detail session opens.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the End Item field.
Type UEF in the Unit Series Code field.
Press Tab. The From Sequence Number and To Sequence Number fields are automatically
populated with the [next available number].
Type [XX]001 in the From Sequence Number field, replacing the existing value. Note: For
example, if the last two digits of your user ID are 01, you would type 01001. Or, if the last two
digits of your user ID are 20, you would type 20001.
Type [XX]002 in the To Sequence Number field, replacing the existing value Note: For
example, if the last two digits of your user ID are 01, you would type 01002. Or, if the last two
digits of your user ID are 20, you would type 20002.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items - Effectivity Series detail session.
The Items - Effectivity Series session displays.
Verify the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column is selected.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Generate Units menu item. The Items – Effectivity Series dialog box opens with the
message: “Do you want to create Effectivity Units for the Sequence Numbers?”
Click the Yes button. The Items – Effectivity Series dialog box opens with the message:
“Effectivity Units have been generated.”
Click the OK button.
Verify the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column is still selected.
Click the References menu.
Click the Effectivity Units menu item. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Type [XX]-U in the second segment of the End Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.

208 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U800 and sequence number [XX]001. The
Effectivity Unit session opens with [your first effectivity unit number] populated in the first
segment of the Effectivity Unit field.
Write down [your first effectivity unit number]: __________________________.
Type Normal Charger in the second segment of the Effectivity Unit field.
Click the Date tab.
Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field.
Note: You may have to pull the Requirement – Effectivity Units panel down to view all the fields
of the top panel.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The first segment of the Effective Date field
is populated.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Effectivity Unit session. The Effectivity
Units session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U800 and sequence number [XX]002. The
Effectivity Unit session opens with [your second effectivity unit number] populated in the
first segment of the Effectivity Unit field.
Write down [your second effectivity unit number]: __________________________.
Type Fast Charger in the second segment of the Effectivity Unit field.
Repeat steps 22 through 26 for this effectivity unit.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Effectivity Units session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items - Effectivity Series session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

209 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.4: Create a requirement
In this exercise, you will create a requirement for the effectivity unit and define the upgrade
price for the end item.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create requirements

Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Requirements > Requirements.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Type [XX]A in the first segment of the Requirement field.
Type Charger in the second segment of the Requirement field.
Type CHARGER in the Category field.
Type C in the Exclusive Indicator field.
Type 2 in the Upgrade Price field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Requirements session.

Part 2: Assign the requirement to the end item

Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Requirements > Item – Requirements.
Click Views > Sort by > Item, Ship-from WH, Ship-to Country, Sold-to BP, Requirement,
Sequence.
Click the New View button.
Click the Zoom button in the second segment of the End Item field. The Items session opens.
Type [XX]-U in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the Item column.
Click the OK button. The Item – Requirements session displays.
Click the New button. A new line displays with 1 populated in the first segment of the Sequence
Number field.
Click the Zoom button in the Requirement field.
Click to select the check box for [XX]A in the Requirement column.
Click the OK button. The Item – Requirements session displays.
Click the Calendar icon in the Effective Date field.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.

210 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Requirements session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 8.5: Maintain BOM and routing

In this exercise, you will add the modified effectivity unit to the bill of material of the main item
and define the exceptions for the effectivity unit. Then you will add the operation to the bill of
material of the main item and calculate the cost price for the effectivity unit.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Maintain BOM

Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Bill of Material.
Click the New View button. A new view displays.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Main Item field.
Press Enter. The bill of material defined for the selected item displays in the list view.
Click the New button. A new line displays with 40 populated in the first segment of the Position
field.
Type 10 in the second segment of the Position field.
Type [XX]-U888 in the second segment of the Item field.
Type 1 in the Net Quantity field.
Verify MAIN is populated in the Warehouse field.
Verify 0 is populated in the Operation field.
Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.

211 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Press Tab four times. A new line displays with 50 populated in the first segment of the Position
field.
Type 20 in the second segment of the Position field.
Type [XX]-U899 in the second segment of the Item field.
Type 1 in the Net Quantity field.
Verify MAIN is populated in the Warehouse field.
Verify 0 is populated in the Operation field.
Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field. A calendar displays with
the current month and year visible.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option. The Effective Date field populates.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the Save button.
Click to select the check box for 40 in the Position column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Exceptions menu item. The Exceptions session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays with [XX]-U888 automatically populated in the second
segment of the Item field.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your first effectivity
unit number] Normal Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Exceptions session displays. [Your first effectivity unit number] is
now populated in the Effectivity Unit field.
Click to select the Valid check box. Scroll to the right to access this box.
Click the Save button.
Verify the check box in the Valid column is still selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Exceptions session. The Bill of Material
session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for position 40. The Bill of Material detail session opens.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Click to clear the Standard Configuration check box.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material detail session. The Bill of
Material session displays.
Click to clear the check box for 40 in the Position column.
Click to select the check box for 50 in the Position column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Exceptions menu item. The Exceptions session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays with [XX]-U899 automatically populated in the second
segment of the Item field.

212 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your second
effectivity unit number] Fast Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Exceptions session displays. [Your second effectivity unit number]
is now populated in the Effectivity Unit field, and the check box in the Valid column is selected.
Click the Save button.
Verify the check box in the Valid column is still selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Exceptions session. The Bill of Material
session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for position 50. The Bill of Material detail session opens.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Click to clear the Standard Configuration check box.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material detail session. The Bill of
Material session displays.
Note: Do not close the Bill of Material session.

Part 2: Add an operation for the routing

Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Item – Routings.
Type [XX]-U in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-U800. The Routing Operations session opens.
Review the default operations 10 and 20 defined for item [XX]-U800.
Click the New button. A new line displays with 30 populated in the Operation field.
Press Tab twice. [XX]-20 is automatically populated in the Task field.
Press Tab again. [XX]-40 is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
Type 4 in the Cycle Time (min) field.
Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option The Effective Date field populates.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the New button. A new line displays with 40 populated in the first segment of the
Operation field.
Press Tab twice. [XX]-20 is automatically populated in the Task field.
Press Tab again. [XX]-40 is automatically populated in the Work Center field.
Type 6 in the Cycle Time (min) field.
Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Effective Date field.
Click the [January 1st of the current year] option The Effective Date field populates.
Type 12:00 AM in the second segment of the Effective Date field.

213 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save button.
Click to select the check box for 30 in the Operation column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Exceptions menu item. The Exceptions session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your first effectivity
unit number] Normal Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Exceptions session displays. [Your first effectivity unit number] is
now populated in the Effectivity Unit field, and the check box in the Valid column is selected.
Click the Save button.
Verify that the Valid check box is still selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Exceptions session. The Routing
Operations session displays.
Click to clear the check box for 30 in the Operation column.
Click to select the check box for 40 in the Operation column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Exceptions menu item. The Exceptions session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Unit session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your second
effectivity unit] Fast Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Exceptions session displays. [Your second effectivity unit number]
is now populated in the Effectivity Unit column, and the check box in the Valid column is
selected.
Click the Save button.
Verify that the Valid check box is still selected.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Exceptions session. The Routing
Operations session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for operation 30. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
Click the Operational tab.
Click to clear the Standard Configuration check box.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for operation 40. The Routing Operations detail session opens.
Click the Operational tab.
Click to clear the Standard Configuration check box.

214 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations detail session. The
Routing Operations session displays.
Click the Bill of Material tab. The Bill of Material session displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Operation field for position 40. The Routing Operations session
opens.
Click to select the check box for 30 in the Operation column.
Click the OK button. The Bill of Material session displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Operation field for position 50. The Routing Operations session
opens.
Click to select the check box for 40 in the Operation column.
Click the OK button. The Bill of Material session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Bill of Material session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Routings session.

Part 3: Calculate the cost price for the effectivity unit

Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Requirements > Requirement - Effectivity Units.
Click Views > Sort by > Requirement, Effectivity Unit.
Click the New View button. A new view displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Requirement field. The Requirement – Effectivity Units window
opens.
Click the Requirements radio button.
Click the OK button. The Requirements session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]A in the Requirement column.
Click the OK button. The Requirement – Effectivity Unit session displays.
Press Enter.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [your first effectivity unit number] Normal Charger in the
Effectivity Unit column and [XX]-U800 in the End Item column.
Click the OK button. The Requirement – Effectivity Unit session displays.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [your second effectivity unit] Fast Charger in the Effectivity
Unit column and [XX]-U800 in the End Item column.
Click the OK button. The Requirement – Effectivity Unit session displays.
Click the Save button.
Click Common > Unit Effectivity > Master Data > Effectivity Units.

215 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Go to Details button for [your first effectivity unit] Normal Charger and end item
[XX]-U800. The Effectivity Unit session opens.
Verify the Configuration Ready check box is cleared.
Click the Prices tab.
Type 10 in the Quantity field.
Click the Sales Characteristics tab.
Click the Calculate button. The value in the Unit Upgrade Price field is updated.
Click the Prices tab.
Click the Calculate button. The values in the Standard Cost section are updated.
Click to select the Configuration Ready check box.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Effectivity Unit session. The Effectivity
Units session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for effectivity unit [your second effectivity unit] Fast Charger
and end item [XX]-U800. The Effectivity Unit session opens.
Verify the Configuration Ready check box is cleared.
Type 4 in the Upgrade Price field for the [XX]A line in the Requirement – Effectivity Units tab
list view.
Click the Save button.
Click the Prices tab.
Type 10 in the Quantity field.
Click the Sales Characteristics tab.
Click the Calculate button. The value in the Unit Upgrade Price is updated.
Click the Prices tab.
Click the Calculate button. The values in the Standard Cost section are updated.
Click to select the Configuration Ready check box
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Effectivity Unit session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Effectivity Units session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Requirement – Effectivity Units session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

216 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.6: Calculate standard cost
In this exercise, you will calculate the standard cost for item [XX]-S800.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Common > Standard Costs > Calculation > Calculate Standard Cost. The Calculate
Standard Cost session opens.
Verify the Top-Down radio button is selected.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the From Item field.
Press Tab. [XX]-U800 is automatically populated in the To Item field.
Click to select the Actualize Standard Cost and Revalue Inventory check box.
Click the Calculate button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Calculate Standard Cost dialog box opens with the message:
“Process ready.”
Click the OK button.
Click the Close button to close the Calculate Standard Cost session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

217 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Logistics process using unit effectivity
Once you have defined the unit effectivity master data you can define the possible variations in an order
and perform the logistics process, which involves the following activities:
• Sales order process
• Production order process
• Outbound items
• Packing/shipping
• Central invoicing

This process involves the LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Unit effectivity logistics procedure process flow in Infor LN

Sales order procedure

By using unit effectivity for item S800, you are essentially dealing with three different items in our
scenario. Therefore, when creating a sales order using unit effectivity, each effectivity unit will be on a
different sales order line with different prices for the same item.

Production order process

Effectivity units are also included in production orders. In the Production Orders session, you can click
References > End Item > Production Order Distribution to view which effectivity unit is being produced.
If you want to distinguish items by effectivity unit in the warehouse, the material needs to be lot-controlled.
To this end a lot number is generated when the order is reported as complete.

218 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Invoicing
After generating and releasing the outbound advice and packing and shipping the items, you can create
the invoice. The invoice refers to the effectivity units in an attachment.

Scenario: Produce and sell an item with different effectivity units

In this part of the scenario, you will produce and sell the U800 Tut smartphone that has been
set up in the system using unit effectivity.
In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

219 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.7: Create and process a sales order
In this exercise, you will create a sales order for the sold-to business partner, link the
effectivity units to the sales order lines, and verify the upgraded price based on the imported
requirement.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a sales order

1. Click Sales > Orders > Order Intake Workbench. The Sales Order Intake Workbench session
opens.
2. Click the Sales Orders tab.
3. Click the New Sales Order button. The Sales Order session opens.
4. Click the Zoom button in the Business Partner field in the Sold-to BP section. The Sold-to
Business Partners session opens.
5. Click to select the check box for BPG0000011 in the Sold-to Business Partner column.
6. Click the OK button. The Sales Order session displays.
7. Press Tab. The default data for the selected business partner is populated in the remaining fields
of the sales order header.
8. Click the Calendar icon in the first segment of the Planned Delivery Date field.
9. Click the [next Monday] option. The first segment of the Planned Delivery Date field is
populated.
10. Type 2:00 PM in the second segment of the Planned Delivery Date field.
11. Press Tab. [Next Monday] is automatically populated in the first segment of the Planned
Receipt Date field.
12. Press Tab. 2:00 PM is automatically populated in the second segment of the Planned Receipt
Date field.
13. Click the Save button. [Your sales order number] is generated in the Number field.
14. Write down the sales order number for future reference: ______________________.

Part 2: Display Effectivity Unit column

Click the Personalization menu on the Order Lines tab.
Click the Personalize Form menu item. The Sales Order Lines (Personalization) window
opens.
Click the Hidden tab in the Columns section.
Click to select the Effectivity Unit check box in the Field column.

220 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Actions menu in the Columns section.
Click the Unhide Selected Objects menu item.
Review the list view in the left pane. The Effectivity Unit column is now displayed in the list
view.
Click the All tab in the Columns section.
Click to select the check box for Effectivity Unit in the Field column.
Click the Up arrow to move the position of the Effectivity Unit column to the right of the third
segment of the Item column.
Click the Save changes and exit button in the Sales Order (Personalization) window. The
Sales Order (Personalization) dialog box opens with the message: “Personalizations have
been saved. Please restart the session to see the changes.”
Click the OK button. The Sales Order session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Sales Order session. The Sales Order
Intake Workbench session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for [your sales order] in the Sales Orders tab list view. The
Sales Order session opens. The Effectivity Unit column is now displayed to the right of the
third segment of the Item column on the Order Lines tab.

Part 3: Define the sales order lines

Click the New Order Line button the Order Lines tab. A new line displays with 10 populated in
the Line field.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Item field for line 10.
Type 10 in the Ordered Quantity field.
Press Tab. The Inventory Shortage Menu session opens with the No Action radio button
selected.
Click the Generate Production Order radio button.
Click the OK button. The Sales Orders session displays. 48.00 is automatically populated in the
Price field for line 10.
Click the New Order Line button on the Order Lines tab. A new line displays with 20 populated
in the Line field.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Item field.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your first effectivity
unit number] Normal Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Sales Orders session displays.
Type 6 in the Ordered Quantity field.
Press Tab. The Inventory Shortage Menu session opens with the No Action radio button
selected.
Click the Generate Production Order radio button.

221 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the OK button. The Sales Order session displays. 50.00 is automatically populated in the
Price field for line 20.
Click the New Order Line button the Order Lines tab. A new line displays with 30 populated in
the Line field.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Item field.
Click the Zoom button in the Effectivity Unit field. The Effectivity Units session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-U800 in the End Item column and [your second
effectivity unit number] Fast Charger in the Effectivity Unit column.
Click the OK button. The Sales Orders session displays
Type 4 in the Ordered Quantity field.
Press Tab. The Inventory Shortage Menu session opens with the No Action radio button
selected.
Click the Generate Production Order radio button.
Click the OK button. The Sales Orders session displays. 52.00 is automatically populated in the
Price field for line 30.
Click the Save button.
Click the Approve button on the header menu bar. The Effectivity Unit Upgrade Price report
displays, followed by the Sales Order Acknowledgements/RMAs report.
Review the upgraded price details for the Normal Charger effectivity unit in the Effectivity Unit
Upgrade Price report.
Review the upgraded price details for the Fast Charger effectivity unit in the Effectivity Unit
Upgrade Price report. Note: Scroll down, if necessary, to view the price details of the other
effectivity unit.
Click Close (X) to close the Effectivity Unit Upgrade Price report. The Sales Order
Acknowledgments/RMAs report displays.
Review the order line details with the effectivity units in the Sales Order
Acknowledgements/RMAs report. Note: Scroll down, if necessary, to view the order line
details.
Click Close (X) to close the Sales Order Acknowledgements/RMAs report. The Sales Order
session displays.
Note: Do not close the Sales Order session.

222 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.8: Create and process production orders
In this exercise, you will create and process the production orders, then report the production
orders as completed and check the lot inventory of the item in the warehouse.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Sales Order session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create production order

Verify [your sales order number] displays in the Number field.
Click Actions > Generate > Generate Production Orders on the header menu bar. The
Generate Production Orders session opens.
Click the Production Order tab.
Click the Zoom button in the Order Series field. The First Free Numbers session opens.
Click to select the check box for PRO in the Series column.
Click the OK button. The Generate Production Orders session displays.
Click the Generate button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Generate Production Order for Sales Order report opens
Review the contents of the Generate Production Order for Sales Order report. [Your three
production order numbers] are listed in the report.
Write down the three production order numbers:
____________________ ______________________ _________________.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Generate Production Order for Sales Order report.
The Generate Production Orders session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Generate Production Orders session. The Sales Order
session displays.
Note: Do not close the Sales Order session.

Part 2: Check production orders

Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders.
Type [XX]-U800 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.

223 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Go to Details button for production order [your first production order number]. The
Production Order session opens.
Review the Operations tab list view. There are two lines.
Click the Materials tab.
Review the Materials tab list view. There are three lines.
Click the References menu on the header menu bar.
Click the Production Order Distribution menu item. The Production Order Distribution
session opens.
Review the Standard Configuration field. A green check mark displays in this field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Distribution session.
The Production Order session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for production order [your second production order number].
The Production Order session opens.
Review the Operations tab list view. There are three lines: operation 10, 20, and 30.
Click the Materials tab.
Review the Materials tab list view. There are four lines. Position 40 has [XX]-U888 populated in
the Item field.
Click the References on the header menu bar.
Click the Production Order Distribution menu item. The Production Order Distribution
session opens.
Review the following items in this session:
• In the header, there is no green check mark in the Standard Configuration field
• In the Distribution tab list view, there is one line with 6 populated in the Quantity Ordered
field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Distribution session.
The Production Order session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Click the Go to Details button for production order [your third production order number]. The
Production Order session opens.
Review the Operations tab list view. There are three lines: operation 10, 20, and 40.
Click the Materials tab.
Review the Materials tab list view. There are four lines. Position 40 has [XX]-U899 populated in
the Item field.
Click the References on the header menu bar.
Click the Production Order Distribution menu item. The Production Order Distribution
session opens.
Review the following items in this session:

224 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 • In the header, there is no green check mark in the Standard Configuration field
• In the Distribution tab list view, there is one line with 4 populated in the Quantity Ordered
field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order Distribution session.
The Production Order session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Order session. The
Production Orders session displays.

Part 3: Report the production order as completed

Click to select the check boxes for [your three production order numbers] in the Production
Order column.
Click the Release Orders button. The Release Production Orders session opens.
Click the Release button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Released Production Orders report opens.
Review the contents of the Released Production Orders report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Released Production Orders report. The Release
Production Orders session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Release Production Orders session. The Production
Orders session displays. Released now displays in the Order Status column for [your three
production orders].
Verify the check box for [your first production order number] is selected.
Click to clear the check boxes for [your second and third production order numbers].
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Orders Completed menu item. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
Type 10 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field under Quantities to Do.
Press Tab.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Generate Lot menu option. [The lot number for your first effectivity unit] is
automatically populated in the Lot Code field.
Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
Click the Production Completed list item.
Click the Save button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message: “No
hours posted! Continue?”
Click the Yes button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
Click the Yes button. Completed now displays in the Order Status field.

225 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Click to clear the check box for [your first production order number].
Click to select the check box for [your second production order number].
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Orders Completed menu item. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
Type 6 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field under Quantities to Do.
Press Tab.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Generate Lot menu item. [The lot number for your second effectivity unit] is
automatically populated in the Lot Code field.
Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
Click the Production Completed list item.
Click the Save button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message: “No
hours posted! Continue?
Click the Yes button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
Click the Yes button. Completed now displays in the Order Status drop-down list.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Click to clear the check box for [your second production order number].
Click to select the check box for [your third production order number].
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Orders Completed menu item. The Report Orders Completed session
opens.
Type 4 in the Additional Quantity to Deliver field under Quantities to Do.
Press Tab.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Generate Lot menu option. [The lot number for your second effectivity unit] is
automatically populated in the Lot Code field.
Click the Order Status drop-down arrow.
Click the Production Completed list item.
Click the Save button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message: “No
hours posted! Continue?
Click the Yes button. The Report Orders Completed dialog box opens with the message:
“Automatically confirm receipt when activating warehouse order inbound line?”
Click the Yes button. Completed now displays in the Order Status field.

226 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Orders Completed session. The
Production Orders session displays. Completed now displays in the Status column for [your
three production orders].
Click to select the check boxes for [your three production order numbers] in the Production
Order column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Close Orders menu item. The Close Production Orders session opens.
Click to select the Print Financial Transactions check box.
Click the Close Orders button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. Two reports display: the Production Order Results (Financial
Transactions) report and the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report.
Review the contents of the Close Production Orders (Process Report) report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the report.
Review the contents of the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions) report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Production Order Results (Financial Transactions)
report. The Production Orders session displays. Closed now displays in the Order Status field
for [your three production order numbers].
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Sales Order session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Sales Order Intake Workbench session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

227 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Exercise 8.9: Generate and release outbound advice
In this exercise, you will generate, release the outbound advice and process the picking list of
the sales order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Generate the outbound advice

Click Warehousing > Orders > Orders. The Warehousing Orders session opens.
Type [your sales order number] in the Order column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.
Click the Go to Details button for [your sales order number]. The Warehousing Order
session opens.
Click to select the check boxes for all three lines in the Outbound Lines tab list view.
Click the Process button on the Outbound Lines tab menu bar. The Select Device window
opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Picking List by Location report opens.
Review the Picking List by Location report. Notice that [your run number] is displayed.
Write down the run number: ___________________.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Picking List by Location report. The Warehousing
Order session opens.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Order session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehousing Orders session
Click Warehousing > Outbound/Inspections > Outbound Advice.
Click the Order column filter drop-down arrow.
Click the Sales list item. The filtered results display.
Type [your sales order number] in the second segment of the Order column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results. Three lines display, each with [your sales order number] in
the Order column.
Click to select the three check boxes for [your sales order number] in the Order column.
Click the Release button.

228 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 Verify the three lines are released by scrolling to the right and ensuring the lines have the green
check mark selected in the Released column.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Outbound Advice session.

Part 2: Process the picking list

1. Click Warehousing > Outbound/Inspections > Picking List.
2. Click the Search button. The Picking – List Search window opens.
3. Click the Clear Fields button.
4. Type [your run number] in the Run field.
5. Click the OK button. The Picking List session displays.
6. Click to select all three check boxes for the three lines displayed in the list view. Note: These
are the shipment lines of the sales order that must be picked.
7. Click the Pick Mission button. A green check mark now displays in the Picked column for all
three lines in the list view. Scroll right to view the Picked column.
Note: Do not close the Picking List session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 8.10: Ship items

In this exercise, you will verify the effectivity details on the shipment lines and confirm the
shipment of the sales order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account] If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Picking List session is open with [your run number] populated in the Run
field.

Exercise steps
1. Click to clear the check boxes for the second and third lines.
2. Verify that only the check box for the first line in the list view is selected.

229 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 3. Click the References menu.
4. Click the Shipment Lines menu option. The Shipment Lines session opens.
5. Click to select all three check boxes for the three order lines of the shipment on the
Shipments tab.
6. Click the Confirm button.
7. Click the Status tab. Confirmed displays in the Status column for all three order lines.
8. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Shipment Lines session.
9. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Picking List session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 8.11: Create invoice

In this exercise, you will create an invoice for the sales order and verify the effectivity unit
details in the invoice, generated as an attachment.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Invoicing > Invoicing 360.
2. Click to select the Source Type column filter drop-down arrow.
3. Click the Sales Order list item. The filtered results display.
4. Type [your sales order number] in the first segment of the Source Document column filter field.
5. Press Enter to filter the results.
6. Click to select the check boxes for all three lines related to [your sales order number].
7. Click the Create Invoice button on the Billable Lines tab menu bar. The Billable Lines dialog
box opens with the message: “Invoices will be created and posted based on the selected billable
lines. Continue?”

230 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

 8. Click the Yes button. The Invoice report opens, followed by the Posting Batches Created
report.
9. Click the Posting Batches Created tab to review the invoice number and batch number of the
invoice in the Posting Batches Created report.
10. Click the Close (X) button to close the Posting Batches Created report. The Invoice report
displays.
11. Review the invoice details.
12. Click the Close (X) button to close the Invoice report.
13. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Invoicing 360 session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

231 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Check your understanding

What is the purpose of unit effectivity?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

The steps for the logistics process using unit effectivity appear below in the wrong order.
Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create and process production orders

Create and process sales order

Generate and release outbound advice

Create invoice

Pack and ship items

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

232 Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning
Estimated time
1.5 hours

Learning objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to explain how to maintain and use tools in production. In
this lesson, you will:
• Describe how to create tools master data.
• Explain how to process purchase of tools.
• Explain how to use tools in production orders.

Topics
• Overview
• Tools master data
• Purchase and use of tools

233 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Overview
The Tools Requirement Planning module is used to control the tools that are required by production
orders. Tools can be linked to operations or an operation step. Infor LN checks the availability of tools for
a scheduled date of operation. It identifies tools shortages for each operation and the recommended
purchase quantity required.
The Tools Requirement Planning module supports the following functions:
• Identification and marking
• Requirements planning
• Procurement (together with the Purchase Control module)
• Dispensing and scheduling
• Refurbishing
• Tracking and disposal
• Performance measurement

Tools planning and tracking

The purpose of tools planning is to estimate the tools that are needed for production orders. If a
production order is planned, the required tools are determined using the routing that is linked to the item.
After the tools are planned, the Estimated Tool Requirements (titrp0111m000) session checks the
availability of the planned tools.
Tool tracking contains the tooling data related to the requests for tools that are linked to the planned
production order and operation. The tool tracking is updated when the tools are returned with the Request
and Return Tools (titrp0215m000) session. Tools are printed by order in the Print Tools Used by Order
(titrp1412m000) session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

234 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Tools master data
Tools are maintained as purchased items with a serial number and can be purchased and stored similarly
to any other purchased item.
The tools master data flow includes the following activities:
• Create new tool
• Define tool numbers and activate tools
• Review and maintain operations
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Tools master data process flow in Infor LN

Defining tools
Tools are defined as purchased items with the Tool item type specification. These items can be
purchased and stored in a warehouse like any other item.
Each physical tool is defined in Infor LN as a combination of tool type and tool number. These terms are
defined in the following table:

Term Definition

Tool type • The tool type is the first level that is used to identify the tool in
the coding system for tools.
• The tool's life, refurbishing data, and the planning method can
be specified for each tool type.
• Some examples of tool types are:

235 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Term Definition

o Hammer
o Screwdriver
o Wheelbarrow

Tool number • A tool number is a number to identify a tool.

• The combination of a tool type (e.g., hammer) and a tool serial
number (e.g., 1) is unique, and identifies a tool in Infor LN.
• Some examples of tool numbers are:
o Hammer 1
o Screwdriver 2
o Wheelbarrow 3

The following is a high-level overview of how to define a tool:

How to define a tool

Step 1 Create a tool.

• Using the Items session:
o Define an item of the type Tool, with the supply source Purchase or Shop
Floor.
o Define subentities, such as: costing data, warehousing data, purchase
data, and ordering data, etc.
• Calculate the standard cost for the newly defined tool.

Step 2 Define tool numbers.

• Use the Tool Numbers (titrp0102m000) session to define tools for the tool
type.
• Every tool type gets a tool serial number.
• You can also specify the general and refurbishing details of each tool.

Step 3 Set status to Active.

Set the Item Warehouse Status field in the Item Data by Warehouse
(whwmd2510m000) session to Active.

If needed, you can create a new tool type using the Tools (titrp0101m000) session by defining the tool
type, then specifying the general and refurbishing details of the tool type.
If more than one tool is required to perform an operation, you can group tools to form a tool kit. To use
tools interchangeably, alternative tools can be defined. Alternative tools are tools that can perform the
same operation.

236 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Operations
The final step in the tools master data process flow is to assign the tool to an operation (or, if necessary,
to an operation step). You can use the Operation (Step) - Tools (tirou1110m000) session to link tools
directly to an operation, or to an operation step of a microrouting. A microrouting is a series of steps that
is linked to a routing operation to which you can connect instructions, tools information, and process
information.
When a production order is released, the information that is linked to the operation steps is given to, for
example, the job shop operators to support their jobs. Tools information linked to operation steps can
indicate, for example, which tools are required to carry out a specific operation.

Link tools to an operation

If the sequence in which the tools are presented on the production order documents is not important, you
can link tools directly to an operation. The following is a high-level overview of how to link a tool to an
operation:

How to link a tool to an operation

Step 1 Open the Routing Operations (tirou1102m000) session.

Step 2 Select a record, and on the appropriate menu, click Tools to start
the Operation (Step) - Tools (tirou1110m000) session.

Step 3 In the Operation (Step) – Tools session, link one or more tools to an
operation.
These linked tools are presented directly below the operation
number on production order documents.

Link tools to an operation step

To add several tools to a specific operation in a specified order, you must link a tool to an operation step
after you have defined operation steps for the operation in the Operation Steps (tirou1105m000) session.
The following is a high-level overview of how to link a tool to an operation:

How to link a tool to an operation step

Step 1 Open the Operation Steps session.

Step 2 Select an operation step for the correct item/routing/operation

combination, and on the appropriate menu, click Tools to start the
Operation (Step) – Tools session.

Step 3 In the Operation (Step) – Tools session, link one or more tools to an
operation step.

237 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

You can either link tools to a specific production order's operation or to operation steps. However, you
cannot link tools to both an operation and operation steps, because planning of tools can only be
performed on one level.
If you add additional tools to the production order by means of the Operation (Step) - Tools session, the
inserted tools are defaulted to future production orders that make use of the relevant operation or the
relevant operation step.

Exercise 9.1: Define a tool

In this exercise, you will copy an existing item to create a purchased item, then you will
define the item as a tool.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Master Data > Items > Items. The Items session opens.
Click the Item Type column filter field drop-down arrow.
Click the Tool list item. The filtered results display.
Click to select the check box for T001A in the Item column.
Click the Duplicate button. The Copy Item Data session opens.
Verify or click to select the following information from the table below:

Field / check box Value

Target section

Item (second segment) [XX]-T900

Description Special screwdriver

Copy section

Item Text Cleared

Business Partners by Item Selected

238 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Field / check box Value

Calculate Standard Cost Selected

and Valuation Price

Approve Conversion Selected

Factors

Click the Copy button.

Click the Close button. The Items session displays the new item you just created.
Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-T900. The Items detail session opens.
Click the Warehousing button. The Item – Warehousing session opens.
Review the data in this session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item – Warehousing session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items detail session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Items session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

239 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Exercise 9.2: Define tool numbers and activate tools
In this exercise, you will define and activate the tools for use in Job Shop and view the
inventory for the tools.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Define and activate the tools

Click Manufacturing > Tools > Tool Numbers.
Click the New button. A new line displays.
Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Tool field.
Press Tab. [Your first tool number] is automatically populated in the Tool Number field, and
New is automatically populated in the Status column.
Write down your first tool number: ____________________________.
Verify the check box in the Job Shop column is selected.
Click the Zoom button in the Buy-from Business Partner field. The Buy-from Business
Partners session opens.
Click to select the check box for BPG000007 in the Buy from Business Partner column.
Click the OK button. The Tool Numbers session displays.
Click the Save button.
Click to select the check box for [your first tool number] in the Tool Number column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Activate menu item. Available now displays in the Status column for [your first tool
number].
Click the New button. A new line displays with [XX]-T900 automatically populated in the second
segment of the Tool field.
Press Tab. [Your second tool number] is automatically populated in the Tool Number field,
and New is automatically populated in the Status column.
Verify [the value of your second tool number] is equal to [the value of your first tool
number +1].
Notes:
• For example, if your first tool number is LOT2020110400025, you would verify there is a 6 at
the end of your second tool number.
• If not, you would delete the 5 at the end of your second tool number and type 6 in its place.
Press Tab.

240 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Verify the check box in the Job Shop check box is selected.
a. Press Tab three times. BPG000007 is automatically populated in the Buy-from
Business Partner field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tool Numbers session.

Part 2: Verify the inventory of the tools

Click Warehousing > Inventory Reporting > Inventory Position > Warehouse - Item
Inventory.
Click the Search button. The Warehouse – Item Inventory - Search window opens.
Click the Item, Warehouse radio button.
Click the Clear Fields button.
Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Item field.
Click the OK button. The filtered results display a single item inventory. 2.0000 is populated in
the Inventory On Hand column in the MAIN warehouse for item [XX]-T900.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouse - Item Inventory session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 9.3: Review and maintain operations

In this exercise, you will review the operations of the main item and assign the operation
steps to the tool.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Item Production > Item – Routings. The Item – Routings
session opens.
Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item column filter field.
Press Enter to filter the results.

241 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Click the Go to Details button for item [XX]-S100. The Routing Operations session opens.
Click to select the Operation 10 check box in the Operation column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Operation Steps menu item. The Operation Steps session opens.
Click the New button. A new line displays with 1 populated in the first segment of the Operation
Step field.
Type Insert Storage Battery in the second segment of the Operation Step field.
Click the Save button.
Click to select the check box for 1 in the Operation Step column.
Click the References menu.
Click the Tools menu item. The Operation (Step) - Tools session opens.
Click the New button. The Operation (Step) - Tools detail session opens.
Click the Zoom button in the second segment of the Tool field. The Operation (Step) - Tools
window opens with the Tools radio button selected.
Click the OK button. The Tools session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-T900 in the Tool column.
Click the OK button. The Operation (Step) - Tools detail session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Operation (Step) - Tools detail session.
The Operation (Step) - Tools session displays. A new line has been added with the following
values populated in the following columns:

Column Value

Sequence 1

Tool [XX]-T900

Use in Tool Planning Selected

Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Operation (Step) - Tools session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Operation Steps session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Routing Operations session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Item - Routings session.

242 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Purchase and use of tools
This section describes the purchase and use of tools in Infor LN. A special part of the purchasing of tools
is the receipt. Because tools are items with serial numbers, these numbers must be generated when the
items are received. The serial numbers are included in the inventory records. As a result, a receipt line
must be generated for every single tool.
The use of tools can be controlled with or without the request and return of tools. The advantage of this
function is that the system cannot assign tools that have not been returned yet. The negative aspect is
the increasing number of transactions.
The purchase and use of tools flow includes the following activities:
• Create purchase order for tools
• Process production orders
• Modify estimated tool requirements
• Check availability planning
• Request tools
• Report operations completed
• Return tools
The process flow for the above activities involves the Infor LN sessions shown in the following diagram:

Purchase and use of tools process flow

243 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Purchase orders
The purchase order process for tools involves creating a purchase order for the manual purchase of tools,
generating the serial numbers for the tools, and receiving the tools in the warehouse.
Tools can only be purchased manually. Because the order system for tools is set to Manual, they are not
considered by supply planning.

Estimated tool requirements

Use the Estimated Tool Requirements (titrp0111m000) session to modify the estimated tool requirements
for production orders and production schedules, and to list tool requirements for service orders and work
orders.
Tool requirements include data about the tool, and about the number of hours or times that the tool is
required to perform an operation or activity. Tool requirements do not specify the work center where the
tool is used. You can maintain tools that are estimated to be issued, or tools that are planned for the job
shop or the service center.
The availability planning for actual orders is generated by means of the Availability Planning
(titrp0513m000) session, after the orders have been entered in the Estimated Tool Requirements
session.
The estimated tool requirements can be returned to the next requirement, to a warehouse, work center, or
another order by using the Request and Return Tools (titrp0215m000) session, which can be started by
clicking Request and Return Tools from the appropriate menu.
Click Tool Requests from the specific menu to start the Tool Requests (titrp0515m000) session. In this
session you can view whether a tool is available at the work center or the service center.
There can only be one estimated tool requirement present for a refurbishing order. For a refurbishing
order, the Line field is always filled.

Availability planning
You use the Availability Planning (titrp0513m000) session to list orders that make use of a critical tool. A
critical tool is a tool that is defined as Critical in Availability Planning in the Tool Types session.
The orders in the Availability Planning session are sorted on the basis of the start date of the order that is
displayed in the Start Date field. For every order, the tool requirements are indicated.
Critical tool data is displayed for the following types of orders:
• Production orders from Manufacturing
• Service orders and work orders from Service
• Planned Resource Requirement Planning orders from Planning
o To include the critical tool data of planned RRP orders in the Availability Planning session,
you must run the session Generate Availability Planning (Planned Production Orders).
o Only the actual scenario is considered.
• Production-order advices in Warehousing
o To include critical tool data of advices in the session Availability Planning, you must run the
session Generate Tools Availability Planning.

244 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Request and return tools
The Request and Return Tools (titrp0215m000) session is used to generate and manage tool requests.
The tool request specifies whether a tool is available at the work center or the service center. A request
can have the following statuses:
• Requested: The tool is requested at the work center or the service center.
• Available: The tool is available at the work center or the service center.
If a tool is requested, the status changes from Available to Requested. If a tool is returned, the status
changes from Requested to Available.
The Tool Requests (titrp0515m000) session is used to list the tool requests which are generated by
means of the Request and Return Tools session. You can see in this session whether a tool is available
at the work center or the service center. In the Tool Request - Lines (titrp0516m000) session more tool
request details are displayed.

Report operations completed

The actual use of the tools is posted once the operation is finished using the Report Operations
Completed session.

Tool number status

The tool number status can be viewed in the Status field of the Tool Numbers session. The possible
values in this field are described in the following table:

Status Description

New When a tool is entered in LN, the tool is assigned the New status.

Available The status must be Available if the tool is to be allocated to a production order
or a service order.
A multipiece tool can only be Available if at least one component is assigned to
the tool in the Tool Components (titrp0506m000) session.
You can only change the status of a multipiece tool to Available if the
components have the Allocated, In Refurbishing, or Available status.
You cannot change the Available status of the tool if the tool has one of the
following the usage statuses:
• Requested
• In Use
• Returned

Blocked Tools with the Blocked status cannot be planned or issued to a production
order or a service order.
You can manually set the status of a tool to Blocked in the Tool Numbers
session. If the tool has the Blocked status, the tool is not considered when:
• Planning new estimated requirements.
• Performing the availability check for tools.

245 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Status Description

You cannot modify the status of a component of a multipiece from Available to

Blocked if a second component with one of the following statuses is assigned
to the multipiece tool:
• Available
• Allocated
• In Refurbishing

Allocated The Allocated status is assigned to a tool when it is requested by means of the
Request and Return Tools (titrp0215m000) session.
When the tool is returned by means of the Request and Return Tools session,
the status changes to Available.

In Refurbishing The In Refurbishing status is assigned to a tool when the tool is requested to be
refurbished by means of the Request and Return Tools session.
Tools with this status will not be planned for issue to a production order or a
service order within the planned period of maintenance.
The tool status changes from In Refurbishing to Available if the tool is returned
using the Request and Return Tools session.

Scenario: Purchase and use tools

As part of our business case, you will purchase and use tools in the production process for
the S100 Circa smartphone. In this scenario, you will perform the following activities:

246 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Exercise 9.4: Create purchase order for tools
In this exercise, you will create a purchase order for the manual purchase of tools, generate
the serial numbers for the tools, and receive the tools in the warehouse.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Create a purchase order

Click Procurement > Orders > Order Intake Workbench. The Purchase Order Intake
Workbench session opens.
Click the New Purchase Order button. The Purchase Order session opens.
Click the Zoom button in the Business Partner field in the Buy-from section. The Buy-from
Business Partners session opens.
Click to select the check box for BPG000007 in the Buy from Business Partner column.
Click the OK button. The Purchase Order session displays.
Press Tab. The default data defined for the selected business partner is populated in the
remaining fields of the purchase order header.
Click the New Order Line button on the Order Lines tab. A new line displays with 10 populated
in the Line field.
Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Item field.
Type 3 in the Ordered Quantity field.
Click the Save button. [Your purchase order number] is populated in the Order field in the
header.
Write down your purchase order number: _____________________________________.
Click the Approve button on the header menu bar. The Print Purchase Order report opens.
Review the contents of the Print Purchase Order report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Print Purchase Order report.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Purchase Order session.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Purchase Order Intake Workbench
session.

Part 2: Generate serial numbers and receive the tools in the warehouse
Click Warehousing > Receipts/Inspections > Receipts. The Warehouse Receipts session
opens.
Type [your purchase order number] in the first segment of the Order column filter field.

247 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Press Enter to filter the results.
Click to select the check box for [your purchase order number] in the Order column.
Click the Receive button on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar.
Verify the check box for [your purchase order number] in the Order column is still selected.
Click the Actions menu on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar.
Click the Generate Serials menu item. The Warehouse Receipts dialog box opens with the
message: “3 serial numbers generated.”
Click the OK button.
Verify the check box for [your purchase order number] in the Order column is still selected.
Click the Confirm button. The Warehouse Receipts dialog box opens with the message: “Next
activity for receipt line XXXXXXXXXX – 10 must be whinh3412m100 Print Goods Received
Note. 2 more error or information messages.”
Click the OK button. A second, similar warehouse receipt dialog box opens.
Click the OK button. A third, similar warehouse receipt dialog box opens.
Click the OK button. The Warehouse Receipts session displays.
Verify the check box for [your purchase order number] in the Order column is still selected.
Click the References menu on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar.
Click the Status Overview menu item. The Inbound Line Status Overview session opens.
Review the contents of the Activities section.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Goods Received Notes menu item. The Print Goods Received Note session opens.
Click to select the Lots and Serials check box.
Click the Print button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Goods Received Note by Order report opens.
Review the contents of the Goods Received Note by Order report.
Click the Close (X) button to close the Goods Received Note by Order report. The Print
Goods Received Note session displays.
Click the Close button to close the Print Goods Received Note session. The Inbound Line
Status Overview session displays. Yes now displays in the Finished column for the Print
Goods Received Note activity.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Inbound Line Status Overview session.
The Warehouse Receipts session displays.
Verify the check box for [your purchase order number] in the Order column is still selected.
Click the Confirm button on the Inbound Lines tab menu bar. The line related to [your
purchase order number] no longer displays in the list view.
Notes:

248 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 • The purchased tools are now available as tool numbers.
• They have the status “New”.
• You can look them up by clicking Manufacturing > Tools > Tool Numbers.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Warehouse Receipts session.

Part 3: Create and activate tool numbers from generated serial numbers
Click Warehousing > Inventory Reporting > Inventory Position > Warehouse - Item
Inventory. The Warehouse – Item Inventory session opens.
Click to select the checkbox for the MAIN warehouse.
Click References > Lots/Serials > Serials. The Item - Serials and Warehouses session
opens. In addition to the two production serials you created earlier, you should see three more
serial numbers, with numbers that continue from the last one you created. These new serial
numbers were generated in part 2 of this exercise. Write down the three serial numbers. See
screenshot below.

Click Manufacturing > Tools > Tool Numbers. The Tool Numbers session opens. You will
now create three new tool numbers from the serial numbers you wrote down.
Click the New button.
Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Tool field.
Press Tab.
Type [the first serial number from step 3 of this exercise] in the Tool Number field.
Verify the Job Shop checkbox is selected.
Type BPG000007 in the Buy from Business Partner field.
Click the Save button.
Click to select the check box for the new tool number.
Click Actions > Activate. The status of the tool number is now Available.
Repeat steps 5-13 for the two remaining serial numbers.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tool Numbers session. The Item –
Serials and Warehouses session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the session. The Warehouse – Item
Inventory session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the session.

249 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 9.5: Process production order

In this exercise, you will create a production order for item [XX]-S100 and release the order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.

Exercise steps
1. Click Manufacturing > Job Shop > Production Orders.
2. Click the New button. The Production Order session opens.
3. Verify SFC displays in the Production Order field.
4. Type [XX]-S100 in the second segment of the Item field.
5. Type 10 in the Quantity Ordered field.
6. Press Tab eight times. Several fields are automatically populated.
7. Verify the following values are populated in the following fields:
• [Today’s date] is populated in the Reference Date field.
• Forward is selected in the Planning Method drop-down list.
• [Today’s date] is populated in the first segment of the Production Start, Requested
Delivery, and Planned Delivery fields.
8. Click the Save button. The following fields are automatically populated with the following data:
• The default operations defined for the selected item are populated in the Operations tab list
view.
• A new production order is populated in the Production Order field.
9. Write down your production order number: __________________________________.
10. Click the Release Order button on the header menu bar. The status Released now displays to
the right of the Production Order field.
11. Click the Save changes and exit button to close Production Order session. The Production
Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

250 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 9.6: Modify estimated tool requirements

In this exercise, you will modify the estimated tool requirements for the production order.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
1. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
selected.
2. Click References > Micro Routing > Estimated Tool Requirements. The Estimated Tool
Requirements session opens.
3. Click to select the check box for [XX]-T900 in the Tool column.
4. Click the Actions menu.
Click the Plan Tools menu item. [Your first tool number] is automatically populated in the Tool
Number column.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Tool Requirements session.
The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

251 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Exercise 9.7: Check availability planning
In this exercise, you will check the availability planning defined for the tool.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Click Manufacturing > Tools > Availability Planning.
Click the Search button. The Availability Planning – Search window opens.
Click the Clear Fields button.
Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Tool field.
Click the OK button. The Availability Planning session displays. A line displays in the list view
displaying availability planning data for the selected tool.
Review the data in the line related to [your first tool number] in the Tool Number column.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Availability Planning session. The
Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

252 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Exercise 9.8: Request tools
In this exercise, you will create a request for the tool and check the status of the tool.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Verify the check box for [your production order] in the Production Order column is selected.
Click References > Microrouting > Estimated Tool Requirements. The Estimated Tool
Requirements session opens.
Click to select the check box for [XX]-T900 in the Tool column.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Request and Return Tools menu item. The Request and Return Tools session
opens.
Verify, click to select, or type the following information from the table below:

Field or check box Value

Action Request

Order Type Production Order

Order Number [your production order

(both segments) number]

Activity (both segments) 10

Step (both segments) 1

From Tool (second [XX]-T900

segment)

To Tool (second segment) [XX]-T900

From Tool Number [your first tool number]

To Tool Number [your first tool number]

253 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Click the Request/Return button. The Select Device session opens.
Click the Display tab.
Type D in the Device field.
Click the Continue button. The Request and Return Tools session displays. A message
displays at the bottom of the session that says “Process finished”.
Click the Close button to close the Request and Return Tools session. The Estimated Tool
Requirements session displays. The value in the Tool Usage column is now updated, and In
Use displays in the Tool Requirement Status column. Scroll right to view these fields.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Tool Requirements session.
The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 9.9: Report operations completed

In this exercise, you will report the operation of the production order as completed.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps
Verify that the check box for [your production order] in the Production Order column is
selected.
Click the Actions menu.
Click the Report Operations Completed menu item. The Report Operations Completed
session opens.
Click the Go to Details button for operation 10. The Report Operations Completed detail
session opens.

254 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Click the Default button to the right of the first segment of the Completed field in the Reported
Item Quantities section. 10 is populated in both segments of the Completed field.
Click the Complete button. The Report Operations Completed dialog box opens with the
message: “Tool [XX]-T900 [your first tool number] is 10 ea past its refurbishing point.”
Click the OK button. Completed now displays to the right of the Operation field.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed detail
session. The Report Operations Completed session displays.
Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Report Operations Completed session.
The Production Orders session displays.
Note: Do not close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 9.10: Check tool number status and return tool

In this exercise, you will check the actual use and the remaining life of the tool and return the
tool.

Before you begin:

• Ensure you have completed all previous exercises and demonstrations because they
provide data or configurations for this exercise.
• Ensure you are logged in to Infor LN with [your student user account]. If not, refer to
Exercise 2.1.
• Ensure the Production Orders session is open.

Exercise steps

Part 1: Check the remaining life of the tool

1. Click Manufacturing > Tools > Tool Numbers.
2. Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Tool column filter field.
3. Press Enter to filter the results. Allocated displays in the Status column for tool [XX]-T900 and
[your first tool number].
4. Click the Go to Details button for tool number [your first tool number]. The Tool Numbers
detail session opens.

255 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 5. Review the following values in the following fields on the Usage tab:
• Free: -10 ea
• Total Free: 490 ea
• Life: 500 ea
6. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tool Numbers detail session. The Tool
Numbers session displays.
7. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tool Numbers session. The Production
Orders session displays.

Part 2: Return the tool

1. Verify the check box for [your production order number] in the Production Order column is
still selected.
Note: When the operation assigned to the tool is completed, the tool must be returned for use in
other production orders.
2. Click References > Micro Routing > Estimated Tool Requirements. The Estimated Tool
Requirements session opens.
3. Click to select the check box for [XX]-T900 in the Tool column and [your first tool number] in
the Tool Number column.
4. Click the Actions menu.
5. Click the Request and Return Tools menu item. The Request and Return Tools session
opens.
6. Click the Action drop-down arrow.
7. Click the Return list item.
8. Verify the following values are populated in the following fields:

Field or check box Value

Order Type Production Order

Order Number [your production order

(both segments) number]

Activity (both segments) 10

Step (both segments) 1

From Tool (second [XX]-T900

segment)

To Tool (second segment) [XX]-T900

From Tool Number [your first tool number]

256 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

 Field or check box Value

To Tool Number [your first tool number]

9. Click the Request/Return button. The Select Device session opens.

10. Click the Display tab.
11. Type D in the Device field.
12. Click the Continue button. The Request and Return Tools session displays. A message at the
bottom of the session states “Process finished”.
13. Click the Close button to close the Request and Return Tools session. The Estimated Tool
Requirements session displays. 0 now displays in the Tool Usage field, and Returned displays
in the Tool Requirement Status field.
14. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Estimated Tool Requirements session.
The Production Orders session displays.
15. Click Manufacturing > Tools > Tool Numbers.
16. Type [XX]-T900 in the second segment of the Tool column filter field.
17. Press Enter to filter the results. Available now displays in the Status column for tool [XX]-T900
and [your first tool number].
18. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Tool Numbers session.
19. Click the Save changes and exit button to close the Production Orders session.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

257 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Check your understanding
The steps for how to define a tool for use in production appear below in the wrong order.
Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Define tool numbers

Create a tool using the Items session

Set status to Active

Calculate the standard cost

Assign the tool to an operation (or operation step)

Why must a receipt line be generated for each tool?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the check your understanding questions.

258 Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

Course summary
Estimated time
.5 hours

Learning objectives
Now that you have completed this course, you should be able to:
• Describe manufacturing concepts.
• Explain how to create manufacturing master data.
• Describe the main elements and activities in the production process in Infor LN.
• Describe the main activities in the production process with direct material issue.
• Explain how to use backflushing in production.
• Explain how to use subcontracting in production.
• Explain how to use order groups in production.
• Explain how to use effectivity units in production.
• Explain how to maintain and use tools in production.

Topics
• Course review

259 Course summary

Course review

Which of the following statements are true about the JSC module in Infor LN? Select all that
apply.

a) It allows you to manually create and modify production orders.

b) It allows you to automatically create production orders.
c) You can use it to plan production orders.
d) You can use it to perform the procedures necessary for the execution of
production orders.

Which two Infor LN sessions can be used to create a BOM?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Identify each of the following statements regarding the production order process as True (T)
or False (F).

You can view whether or not a production order document has been printed
using the Production Orders session.

After you have reported a production order completed, you can no longer
process material issues for the production order, or post hours to it.

Only Completed production orders can be closed.

260 Course summary

 What does the JSC Operator Workbench operator make it possible for a work center/machine
operator to do in Infor LN?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is backflushing?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is the purpose of a subcontracting model in Infor LN?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

261 Course summary

 What are the two ways in which JSC order groups can be created in Infor LN?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Describe the process of creating a requirement when using unit effectivity.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

What is the purpose of tools planning?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Refer to Appendix B for answers to the Course review questions.

262 Course summary

Appendices
The following are included in this section:
• Appendix A: User accounts
• Appendix B: Check your understanding (CYU) answers

263 Appendices
Appendix A: User accounts
Your instructor will assign you a student user ID from the table listed below to use for class exercises.
Note: If you are taking this course as SDL, refer to the Training Desktop Login Instructions on the Lab On
Demand screen.

Course Name/Code – LN: Configuring Manufacturing for the Cloud (01_9022005_IEN0042_ELN)

Training ID User Password

Environment entry
point (VM)

LN CE Desktop All Infortrn Infor123!

Server

Application ID User name Password

Instructor login (for Instructor [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

course demos):
Infor LN Cloud

Student logins (for Student 01 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

course exercises):
Infor LN Cloud

Student 02 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 03 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 04 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 05 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 06 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 07 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 08 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 09 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 10 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 11 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 12 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

264 Appendices
 Student 13 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 14 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 15 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 16 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 17 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 18 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 19 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 20 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 21 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 22 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 23 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

Student 24 [CMP#][email protected] <varies>

265 Appendices
Appendix B: Check your understanding answers
This section provides the answers to the questions found at the end of each lesson.

Lesson 1: Introduction

What is a production order in Infor LN?

A production order comprises the order to produce an item and the conditions under which
manufacturing takes place, such as the routing that is used, the delivery date, and the order
quantity.

How are production orders originated in Infor LN?

Production orders:
• Are usually generated from Enterprise Planning and Warehousing, then transferred to
the Production Orders session in Manufacturing.
• Can be manually defined in the Production Orders session.

Lesson 2: Manufacturing master data

Which two Infor sessions can be used to create a BOM?

• Production Item 360

• Bill of Material

List the types of master data that must be created when defining the shop floor layout.

Work centers, employees, machines, and tasks

266 Appendices
 The steps for how to calculate cost and valuation prices for a manufactured item and its
linked components appear below in the wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-3 to reflect
the correct sequence.

Update the standard costs for the main item and subassemblies 2

Print the standard cost calculation of the main item 3

Calculate the standard costs for the main item and subassemblies 1

Lesson 3: Production process with manual material issue

The steps for how to process a production order with manual material issue appear below in
the wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-9 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create production order 1

Initiate material from production order 3

Print production order documents and release order 2

Generate and release outbound advice 4

Report operation complete 5

Close production order 9

Report order completed 7

Register hours 6

Process warehouse receipt 8

Lesson 4: Production process with direct material issue

Which two check boxes must be enabled for an item in the Item – Production session in order
to activate direct processing of materials for production?

• Direct Initiate Inventory Issue

• Direct Process Warehouse Order Line

267 Appendices
 After recording the time taken by an operator to complete a task using the Setup button in
JSC Operator Workbench, in which session is the recorded time registered?

The Production Order Hours session

Lesson 5: Production process with backflushing

In order to enable backflushing in production for materials and hours, which check boxes
must be enabled for an item in the Item-Production session?

• Allow backflushing as material

• Backflush materials
• Backflush hours

In order to enable backflushing for operations, which check box must be enabled in the
Routing Operations session for each operation related to the main item?

Backflushing

The steps for how to process a production order with backflushing appear below in the
wrong order. Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create production order 1

Print production order documents and release order 2

Backflush materials and hours 4

Report order completed 3

Close production order 5

268 Appendices
Lesson 6: Subcontracting

Describe the types of master data that must be configured to use subcontracting.

The Subcontracting with Material flow check box must be selected in the Implemented
Software Components session. In addition, the following must be defined:
• Subcontractor business partner data
• An administrative warehouse (supplier warehouse)
• An automatic procedure for warehouse receipt
• A warehousing order type for subcontracting
• A default order type specific to subcontracting for transfers between warehouses
• A purchase order type for a subcontracting order with material flow

Describe the subcontracting process with material support in Infor LN.

This kind of subcontracting includes not only outsourcing work, but also the supply and
receipt of the required material.
Infor LN supports the physical and administrative flow of subassemblies as well as the
required material.
After the subcontractor has finished the activities on the subcontracted items the items are
shipped back to the manufacturer.

Lesson 7: Order groups

What is the purpose of order groups in Enterprise Planning?

EP order groups enable you to process planned production orders more efficiently.
After creating an EP order group, you can collectively confirm the planned orders in that EP
order group or transfer the planned orders to production.

269 Appendices
 The steps for how to create an order group in Enterprise Planning appear below in the wrong
order. Reorder the steps from 1-3 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create an order group for planned production orders 2

Create planned production orders 1

Assign planned orders to order group 3

What is the purpose of JSC order groups?

A JSC order group is a group of production orders defined by the user that can be used to
carry out actions on all the production orders within the group at the same time, making
order processing more efficient.

The steps for how to process JSC order groups in production appear below in the wrong
order. Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Print order documents and release production orders 1

Report operations completed by order group 2

Close production orders 4

Report orders completed globally 3

Lesson 8: Unit effectivity

What is the purpose of unit effectivity?

Unit effectivity is a method to control the validity of variations on an end item.

You can use unit effectivity for pegging purposes, or to model exceptions from a standard
end item so that you can make variations without having to define separate item codes.
As a result, you do not need to maintain separate BOMs for every combination of variations.

270 Appendices
 The steps for the logistics process using unit effectivity appear below in the wrong order.
Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Create and process production orders 2

Create and process sales order 1

Generate and release outbound advice 3

Create invoice 5

Pack and ship items 4

Lesson 9: Tools requirement planning

The steps for how to define a tool for use in production appear below in the wrong order.
Reorder the steps from 1-5 to reflect the correct sequence.

Define tool numbers 3

Create a tool using the Items session 1

Set status to Active 4

Calculate the standard cost 2

Assign the tool to an operation (or operation step) 5

Why must a receipt line be generated for each tool?

Because tools are serialized items, serial numbers must be generated when the items are
received. The serial numbers are included in the inventory records.
As a result, a receipt line must be generated for every single tool.

271 Appendices
Course review

Which of the following statements are true about the JSC module in Infor LN? Select all that
apply.

a) It allows you to manually create and modify production orders.

b) It allows you to automatically create production orders.
c) You can use it to plan production orders.
d) You can use it to perform the procedures necessary for the execution of
production orders.

Which two Infor LN sessions can be used to create a BOM?

• Production Item 360

• Bill of Material

Identify each of the following statements regarding the production order process as True (T)
or False (F).

You can view whether or not a production order document has been printed
T
using the Production Orders session.

After you have reported a production order completed, you can no longer
F
process material issues for the production order, or post hours to it.

Only Completed production orders can be closed. T

What does the JSC Operator Workbench operator make it possible for a work center/machine
operator to do in Infor LN?

• Record production order operation set up and run times

• Register completed and rejected quantities
• Report operations complete
• View production order operation data
• Filter and sort operation data

272 Appendices
 What is backflushing?

Backflushing is the automatic issue of materials from inventory, or accounting for the hours
spent manufacturing an item, based on theoretical usage and the quantity of the item
reported as complete.

What is the purpose of a subcontracting model in Infor LN?

A subcontracting model contains all the data needed for subcontracting.

The Subcontracting Models (tisub1100m000) session is used to manage models for
subcontracting manufacture of subassemblies or end product.

What are the two ways in which JSC order groups can be created in Infor LN?

You can create order groups directly in the JSC module using the Create Production Order
Group session, or you can create them earlier in the process in Enterprise Planning.

Describe the process of creating a requirement when using unit effectivity.

• Create a new requirement in the Requirements session.

• Define the upgrade price for the end item.
• Assign the requirement to the end item using the Item – Requirements session.

What is the purpose of tools planning?

The purpose is to estimate the tools that are needed for production orders.
If a production order is planned, the required tools are determined using the routing that is
linked to the item.
After the tools are planned, the Estimated Tool Requirements session checks the availability
of the planned tools.

273 Appendices